1 /* 2 ** 2001 September 15 3 ** 4 ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of 5 ** a legal notice, here is a blessing: 6 ** 7 ** May you do good and not evil. 8 ** May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others. 9 ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. 10 ** 11 ************************************************************************* 12 ** The code in this file implements the function that runs the 13 ** bytecode of a prepared statement. 14 ** 15 ** Various scripts scan this source file in order to generate HTML 16 ** documentation, headers files, or other derived files. The formatting 17 ** of the code in this file is, therefore, important. See other comments 18 ** in this file for details. If in doubt, do not deviate from existing 19 ** commenting and indentation practices when changing or adding code. 20 */ 21 #include "sqliteInt.h" 22 #include "vdbeInt.h" 23 24 /* 25 ** Invoke this macro on memory cells just prior to changing the 26 ** value of the cell. This macro verifies that shallow copies are 27 ** not misused. A shallow copy of a string or blob just copies a 28 ** pointer to the string or blob, not the content. If the original 29 ** is changed while the copy is still in use, the string or blob might 30 ** be changed out from under the copy. This macro verifies that nothing 31 ** like that ever happens. 32 */ 33 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 34 # define memAboutToChange(P,M) sqlite3VdbeMemAboutToChange(P,M) 35 #else 36 # define memAboutToChange(P,M) 37 #endif 38 39 /* 40 ** The following global variable is incremented every time a cursor 41 ** moves, either by the OP_SeekXX, OP_Next, or OP_Prev opcodes. The test 42 ** procedures use this information to make sure that indices are 43 ** working correctly. This variable has no function other than to 44 ** help verify the correct operation of the library. 45 */ 46 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 47 int sqlite3_search_count = 0; 48 #endif 49 50 /* 51 ** When this global variable is positive, it gets decremented once before 52 ** each instruction in the VDBE. When it reaches zero, the u1.isInterrupted 53 ** field of the sqlite3 structure is set in order to simulate an interrupt. 54 ** 55 ** This facility is used for testing purposes only. It does not function 56 ** in an ordinary build. 57 */ 58 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 59 int sqlite3_interrupt_count = 0; 60 #endif 61 62 /* 63 ** The next global variable is incremented each type the OP_Sort opcode 64 ** is executed. The test procedures use this information to make sure that 65 ** sorting is occurring or not occurring at appropriate times. This variable 66 ** has no function other than to help verify the correct operation of the 67 ** library. 68 */ 69 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 70 int sqlite3_sort_count = 0; 71 #endif 72 73 /* 74 ** The next global variable records the size of the largest MEM_Blob 75 ** or MEM_Str that has been used by a VDBE opcode. The test procedures 76 ** use this information to make sure that the zero-blob functionality 77 ** is working correctly. This variable has no function other than to 78 ** help verify the correct operation of the library. 79 */ 80 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 81 int sqlite3_max_blobsize = 0; 82 static void updateMaxBlobsize(Mem *p){ 83 if( (p->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))!=0 && p->n>sqlite3_max_blobsize ){ 84 sqlite3_max_blobsize = p->n; 85 } 86 } 87 #endif 88 89 /* 90 ** The next global variable is incremented each time the OP_Found opcode 91 ** is executed. This is used to test whether or not the foreign key 92 ** operation implemented using OP_FkIsZero is working. This variable 93 ** has no function other than to help verify the correct operation of the 94 ** library. 95 */ 96 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 97 int sqlite3_found_count = 0; 98 #endif 99 100 /* 101 ** Test a register to see if it exceeds the current maximum blob size. 102 ** If it does, record the new maximum blob size. 103 */ 104 #if defined(SQLITE_TEST) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_BUILTIN_TEST) 105 # define UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(P) updateMaxBlobsize(P) 106 #else 107 # define UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(P) 108 #endif 109 110 /* 111 ** Invoke the VDBE coverage callback, if that callback is defined. This 112 ** feature is used for test suite validation only and does not appear an 113 ** production builds. 114 ** 115 ** M is an integer, 2 or 3, that indices how many different ways the 116 ** branch can go. It is usually 2. "I" is the direction the branch 117 ** goes. 0 means falls through. 1 means branch is taken. 2 means the 118 ** second alternative branch is taken. 119 ** 120 ** iSrcLine is the source code line (from the __LINE__ macro) that 121 ** generated the VDBE instruction. This instrumentation assumes that all 122 ** source code is in a single file (the amalgamation). Special values 1 123 ** and 2 for the iSrcLine parameter mean that this particular branch is 124 ** always taken or never taken, respectively. 125 */ 126 #if !defined(SQLITE_VDBE_COVERAGE) 127 # define VdbeBranchTaken(I,M) 128 #else 129 # define VdbeBranchTaken(I,M) vdbeTakeBranch(pOp->iSrcLine,I,M) 130 static void vdbeTakeBranch(int iSrcLine, u8 I, u8 M){ 131 if( iSrcLine<=2 && ALWAYS(iSrcLine>0) ){ 132 M = iSrcLine; 133 /* Assert the truth of VdbeCoverageAlwaysTaken() and 134 ** VdbeCoverageNeverTaken() */ 135 assert( (M & I)==I ); 136 }else{ 137 if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xVdbeBranch==0 ) return; /*NO_TEST*/ 138 sqlite3GlobalConfig.xVdbeBranch(sqlite3GlobalConfig.pVdbeBranchArg, 139 iSrcLine,I,M); 140 } 141 } 142 #endif 143 144 /* 145 ** Convert the given register into a string if it isn't one 146 ** already. Return non-zero if a malloc() fails. 147 */ 148 #define Stringify(P, enc) \ 149 if(((P)->flags&(MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))==0 && sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(P,enc,0)) \ 150 { goto no_mem; } 151 152 /* 153 ** An ephemeral string value (signified by the MEM_Ephem flag) contains 154 ** a pointer to a dynamically allocated string where some other entity 155 ** is responsible for deallocating that string. Because the register 156 ** does not control the string, it might be deleted without the register 157 ** knowing it. 158 ** 159 ** This routine converts an ephemeral string into a dynamically allocated 160 ** string that the register itself controls. In other words, it 161 ** converts an MEM_Ephem string into a string with P.z==P.zMalloc. 162 */ 163 #define Deephemeralize(P) \ 164 if( ((P)->flags&MEM_Ephem)!=0 \ 165 && sqlite3VdbeMemMakeWriteable(P) ){ goto no_mem;} 166 167 /* Return true if the cursor was opened using the OP_OpenSorter opcode. */ 168 #define isSorter(x) ((x)->eCurType==CURTYPE_SORTER) 169 170 /* 171 ** Allocate VdbeCursor number iCur. Return a pointer to it. Return NULL 172 ** if we run out of memory. 173 */ 174 static VdbeCursor *allocateCursor( 175 Vdbe *p, /* The virtual machine */ 176 int iCur, /* Index of the new VdbeCursor */ 177 int nField, /* Number of fields in the table or index */ 178 int iDb, /* Database the cursor belongs to, or -1 */ 179 u8 eCurType /* Type of the new cursor */ 180 ){ 181 /* Find the memory cell that will be used to store the blob of memory 182 ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a 183 ** vdbe memory cell to manage the memory allocation required for a 184 ** VdbeCursor structure for the following reasons: 185 ** 186 ** * Sometimes cursor numbers are used for a couple of different 187 ** purposes in a vdbe program. The different uses might require 188 ** different sized allocations. Memory cells provide growable 189 ** allocations. 190 ** 191 ** * When using ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT, memory cell buffers can 192 ** be freed lazily via the sqlite3_release_memory() API. This 193 ** minimizes the number of malloc calls made by the system. 194 ** 195 ** Memory cells for cursors are allocated at the top of the address 196 ** space. Memory cell (p->nMem) corresponds to cursor 0. Space for 197 ** cursor 1 is managed by memory cell (p->nMem-1), etc. 198 */ 199 Mem *pMem = &p->aMem[p->nMem-iCur]; 200 201 int nByte; 202 VdbeCursor *pCx = 0; 203 nByte = 204 ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) + 2*sizeof(u32)*nField + 205 (eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE?sqlite3BtreeCursorSize():0); 206 207 assert( iCur<p->nCursor ); 208 if( p->apCsr[iCur] ){ 209 sqlite3VdbeFreeCursor(p, p->apCsr[iCur]); 210 p->apCsr[iCur] = 0; 211 } 212 if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize(pMem, nByte) ){ 213 p->apCsr[iCur] = pCx = (VdbeCursor*)pMem->z; 214 memset(pCx, 0, sizeof(VdbeCursor)); 215 pCx->eCurType = eCurType; 216 pCx->iDb = iDb; 217 pCx->nField = nField; 218 pCx->aOffset = &pCx->aType[nField]; 219 if( eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ){ 220 pCx->uc.pCursor = (BtCursor*) 221 &pMem->z[ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeCursor))+2*sizeof(u32)*nField]; 222 sqlite3BtreeCursorZero(pCx->uc.pCursor); 223 } 224 } 225 return pCx; 226 } 227 228 /* 229 ** Try to convert a value into a numeric representation if we can 230 ** do so without loss of information. In other words, if the string 231 ** looks like a number, convert it into a number. If it does not 232 ** look like a number, leave it alone. 233 ** 234 ** If the bTryForInt flag is true, then extra effort is made to give 235 ** an integer representation. Strings that look like floating point 236 ** values but which have no fractional component (example: '48.00') 237 ** will have a MEM_Int representation when bTryForInt is true. 238 ** 239 ** If bTryForInt is false, then if the input string contains a decimal 240 ** point or exponential notation, the result is only MEM_Real, even 241 ** if there is an exact integer representation of the quantity. 242 */ 243 static void applyNumericAffinity(Mem *pRec, int bTryForInt){ 244 double rValue; 245 i64 iValue; 246 u8 enc = pRec->enc; 247 assert( (pRec->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Int|MEM_Real))==MEM_Str ); 248 if( sqlite3AtoF(pRec->z, &rValue, pRec->n, enc)==0 ) return; 249 if( 0==sqlite3Atoi64(pRec->z, &iValue, pRec->n, enc) ){ 250 pRec->u.i = iValue; 251 pRec->flags |= MEM_Int; 252 }else{ 253 pRec->u.r = rValue; 254 pRec->flags |= MEM_Real; 255 if( bTryForInt ) sqlite3VdbeIntegerAffinity(pRec); 256 } 257 } 258 259 /* 260 ** Processing is determine by the affinity parameter: 261 ** 262 ** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER: 263 ** SQLITE_AFF_REAL: 264 ** SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC: 265 ** Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a 266 ** floating-point representation if an integer representation 267 ** is not possible. Note that the integer representation is 268 ** always preferred, even if the affinity is REAL, because 269 ** an integer representation is more space efficient on disk. 270 ** 271 ** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT: 272 ** Convert pRec to a text representation. 273 ** 274 ** SQLITE_AFF_BLOB: 275 ** No-op. pRec is unchanged. 276 */ 277 static void applyAffinity( 278 Mem *pRec, /* The value to apply affinity to */ 279 char affinity, /* The affinity to be applied */ 280 u8 enc /* Use this text encoding */ 281 ){ 282 if( affinity>=SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ){ 283 assert( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER || affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL 284 || affinity==SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ); 285 if( (pRec->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){ 286 if( (pRec->flags & MEM_Real)==0 ){ 287 if( pRec->flags & MEM_Str ) applyNumericAffinity(pRec,1); 288 }else{ 289 sqlite3VdbeIntegerAffinity(pRec); 290 } 291 } 292 }else if( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ){ 293 /* Only attempt the conversion to TEXT if there is an integer or real 294 ** representation (blob and NULL do not get converted) but no string 295 ** representation. 296 */ 297 if( 0==(pRec->flags&MEM_Str) && (pRec->flags&(MEM_Real|MEM_Int)) ){ 298 sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(pRec, enc, 1); 299 } 300 pRec->flags &= ~(MEM_Real|MEM_Int); 301 } 302 } 303 304 /* 305 ** Try to convert the type of a function argument or a result column 306 ** into a numeric representation. Use either INTEGER or REAL whichever 307 ** is appropriate. But only do the conversion if it is possible without 308 ** loss of information and return the revised type of the argument. 309 */ 310 int sqlite3_value_numeric_type(sqlite3_value *pVal){ 311 int eType = sqlite3_value_type(pVal); 312 if( eType==SQLITE_TEXT ){ 313 Mem *pMem = (Mem*)pVal; 314 applyNumericAffinity(pMem, 0); 315 eType = sqlite3_value_type(pVal); 316 } 317 return eType; 318 } 319 320 /* 321 ** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*, 322 ** not the internal Mem* type. 323 */ 324 void sqlite3ValueApplyAffinity( 325 sqlite3_value *pVal, 326 u8 affinity, 327 u8 enc 328 ){ 329 applyAffinity((Mem *)pVal, affinity, enc); 330 } 331 332 /* 333 ** pMem currently only holds a string type (or maybe a BLOB that we can 334 ** interpret as a string if we want to). Compute its corresponding 335 ** numeric type, if has one. Set the pMem->u.r and pMem->u.i fields 336 ** accordingly. 337 */ 338 static u16 SQLITE_NOINLINE computeNumericType(Mem *pMem){ 339 assert( (pMem->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real))==0 ); 340 assert( (pMem->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))!=0 ); 341 if( sqlite3AtoF(pMem->z, &pMem->u.r, pMem->n, pMem->enc)==0 ){ 342 return 0; 343 } 344 if( sqlite3Atoi64(pMem->z, &pMem->u.i, pMem->n, pMem->enc)==SQLITE_OK ){ 345 return MEM_Int; 346 } 347 return MEM_Real; 348 } 349 350 /* 351 ** Return the numeric type for pMem, either MEM_Int or MEM_Real or both or 352 ** none. 353 ** 354 ** Unlike applyNumericAffinity(), this routine does not modify pMem->flags. 355 ** But it does set pMem->u.r and pMem->u.i appropriately. 356 */ 357 static u16 numericType(Mem *pMem){ 358 if( pMem->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real) ){ 359 return pMem->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real); 360 } 361 if( pMem->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob) ){ 362 return computeNumericType(pMem); 363 } 364 return 0; 365 } 366 367 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 368 /* 369 ** Write a nice string representation of the contents of cell pMem 370 ** into buffer zBuf, length nBuf. 371 */ 372 void sqlite3VdbeMemPrettyPrint(Mem *pMem, char *zBuf){ 373 char *zCsr = zBuf; 374 int f = pMem->flags; 375 376 static const char *const encnames[] = {"(X)", "(8)", "(16LE)", "(16BE)"}; 377 378 if( f&MEM_Blob ){ 379 int i; 380 char c; 381 if( f & MEM_Dyn ){ 382 c = 'z'; 383 assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Ephem))==0 ); 384 }else if( f & MEM_Static ){ 385 c = 't'; 386 assert( (f & (MEM_Dyn|MEM_Ephem))==0 ); 387 }else if( f & MEM_Ephem ){ 388 c = 'e'; 389 assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Dyn))==0 ); 390 }else{ 391 c = 's'; 392 } 393 394 sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr, "%c", c); 395 zCsr += sqlite3Strlen30(zCsr); 396 sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr, "%d[", pMem->n); 397 zCsr += sqlite3Strlen30(zCsr); 398 for(i=0; i<16 && i<pMem->n; i++){ 399 sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr, "%02X", ((int)pMem->z[i] & 0xFF)); 400 zCsr += sqlite3Strlen30(zCsr); 401 } 402 for(i=0; i<16 && i<pMem->n; i++){ 403 char z = pMem->z[i]; 404 if( z<32 || z>126 ) *zCsr++ = '.'; 405 else *zCsr++ = z; 406 } 407 408 sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr, "]%s", encnames[pMem->enc]); 409 zCsr += sqlite3Strlen30(zCsr); 410 if( f & MEM_Zero ){ 411 sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr,"+%dz",pMem->u.nZero); 412 zCsr += sqlite3Strlen30(zCsr); 413 } 414 *zCsr = '\0'; 415 }else if( f & MEM_Str ){ 416 int j, k; 417 zBuf[0] = ' '; 418 if( f & MEM_Dyn ){ 419 zBuf[1] = 'z'; 420 assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Ephem))==0 ); 421 }else if( f & MEM_Static ){ 422 zBuf[1] = 't'; 423 assert( (f & (MEM_Dyn|MEM_Ephem))==0 ); 424 }else if( f & MEM_Ephem ){ 425 zBuf[1] = 'e'; 426 assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Dyn))==0 ); 427 }else{ 428 zBuf[1] = 's'; 429 } 430 k = 2; 431 sqlite3_snprintf(100, &zBuf[k], "%d", pMem->n); 432 k += sqlite3Strlen30(&zBuf[k]); 433 zBuf[k++] = '['; 434 for(j=0; j<15 && j<pMem->n; j++){ 435 u8 c = pMem->z[j]; 436 if( c>=0x20 && c<0x7f ){ 437 zBuf[k++] = c; 438 }else{ 439 zBuf[k++] = '.'; 440 } 441 } 442 zBuf[k++] = ']'; 443 sqlite3_snprintf(100,&zBuf[k], encnames[pMem->enc]); 444 k += sqlite3Strlen30(&zBuf[k]); 445 zBuf[k++] = 0; 446 } 447 } 448 #endif 449 450 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 451 /* 452 ** Print the value of a register for tracing purposes: 453 */ 454 static void memTracePrint(Mem *p){ 455 if( p->flags & MEM_Undefined ){ 456 printf(" undefined"); 457 }else if( p->flags & MEM_Null ){ 458 printf(" NULL"); 459 }else if( (p->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Str))==(MEM_Int|MEM_Str) ){ 460 printf(" si:%lld", p->u.i); 461 }else if( p->flags & MEM_Int ){ 462 printf(" i:%lld", p->u.i); 463 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT 464 }else if( p->flags & MEM_Real ){ 465 printf(" r:%g", p->u.r); 466 #endif 467 }else if( p->flags & MEM_RowSet ){ 468 printf(" (rowset)"); 469 }else{ 470 char zBuf[200]; 471 sqlite3VdbeMemPrettyPrint(p, zBuf); 472 printf(" %s", zBuf); 473 } 474 } 475 static void registerTrace(int iReg, Mem *p){ 476 printf("REG[%d] = ", iReg); 477 memTracePrint(p); 478 printf("\n"); 479 } 480 #endif 481 482 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 483 # define REGISTER_TRACE(R,M) if(db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace)registerTrace(R,M) 484 #else 485 # define REGISTER_TRACE(R,M) 486 #endif 487 488 489 #ifdef VDBE_PROFILE 490 491 /* 492 ** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing 493 ** high-performance timing routines. 494 */ 495 #include "hwtime.h" 496 497 #endif 498 499 #ifndef NDEBUG 500 /* 501 ** This function is only called from within an assert() expression. It 502 ** checks that the sqlite3.nTransaction variable is correctly set to 503 ** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the 504 ** linked list starting at sqlite3.pSavepoint. 505 ** 506 ** Usage: 507 ** 508 ** assert( checkSavepointCount(db) ); 509 */ 510 static int checkSavepointCount(sqlite3 *db){ 511 int n = 0; 512 Savepoint *p; 513 for(p=db->pSavepoint; p; p=p->pNext) n++; 514 assert( n==(db->nSavepoint + db->isTransactionSavepoint) ); 515 return 1; 516 } 517 #endif 518 519 /* 520 ** Return the register of pOp->p2 after first preparing it to be 521 ** overwritten with an integer value. 522 */ 523 static SQLITE_NOINLINE Mem *out2PrereleaseWithClear(Mem *pOut){ 524 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); 525 pOut->flags = MEM_Int; 526 return pOut; 527 } 528 static Mem *out2Prerelease(Vdbe *p, VdbeOp *pOp){ 529 Mem *pOut; 530 assert( pOp->p2>0 ); 531 assert( pOp->p2<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 532 pOut = &p->aMem[pOp->p2]; 533 memAboutToChange(p, pOut); 534 if( VdbeMemDynamic(pOut) ){ 535 return out2PrereleaseWithClear(pOut); 536 }else{ 537 pOut->flags = MEM_Int; 538 return pOut; 539 } 540 } 541 542 543 /* 544 ** Execute as much of a VDBE program as we can. 545 ** This is the core of sqlite3_step(). 546 */ 547 int sqlite3VdbeExec( 548 Vdbe *p /* The VDBE */ 549 ){ 550 Op *aOp = p->aOp; /* Copy of p->aOp */ 551 Op *pOp = aOp; /* Current operation */ 552 #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) || defined(VDBE_PROFILE) 553 Op *pOrigOp; /* Value of pOp at the top of the loop */ 554 #endif 555 int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Value to return */ 556 sqlite3 *db = p->db; /* The database */ 557 u8 resetSchemaOnFault = 0; /* Reset schema after an error if positive */ 558 u8 encoding = ENC(db); /* The database encoding */ 559 int iCompare = 0; /* Result of last OP_Compare operation */ 560 unsigned nVmStep = 0; /* Number of virtual machine steps */ 561 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK 562 unsigned nProgressLimit = 0;/* Invoke xProgress() when nVmStep reaches this */ 563 #endif 564 Mem *aMem = p->aMem; /* Copy of p->aMem */ 565 Mem *pIn1 = 0; /* 1st input operand */ 566 Mem *pIn2 = 0; /* 2nd input operand */ 567 Mem *pIn3 = 0; /* 3rd input operand */ 568 Mem *pOut = 0; /* Output operand */ 569 int *aPermute = 0; /* Permutation of columns for OP_Compare */ 570 i64 lastRowid = db->lastRowid; /* Saved value of the last insert ROWID */ 571 #ifdef VDBE_PROFILE 572 u64 start; /* CPU clock count at start of opcode */ 573 #endif 574 /*** INSERT STACK UNION HERE ***/ 575 576 assert( p->magic==VDBE_MAGIC_RUN ); /* sqlite3_step() verifies this */ 577 sqlite3VdbeEnter(p); 578 if( p->rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ){ 579 /* This happens if a malloc() inside a call to sqlite3_column_text() or 580 ** sqlite3_column_text16() failed. */ 581 goto no_mem; 582 } 583 assert( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->rc&0xff)==SQLITE_BUSY ); 584 assert( p->bIsReader || p->readOnly!=0 ); 585 p->rc = SQLITE_OK; 586 p->iCurrentTime = 0; 587 assert( p->explain==0 ); 588 p->pResultSet = 0; 589 db->busyHandler.nBusy = 0; 590 if( db->u1.isInterrupted ) goto abort_due_to_interrupt; 591 sqlite3VdbeIOTraceSql(p); 592 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK 593 if( db->xProgress ){ 594 u32 iPrior = p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP]; 595 assert( 0 < db->nProgressOps ); 596 nProgressLimit = db->nProgressOps - (iPrior % db->nProgressOps); 597 } 598 #endif 599 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 600 sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc(); 601 if( p->pc==0 602 && (p->db->flags & (SQLITE_VdbeListing|SQLITE_VdbeEQP|SQLITE_VdbeTrace))!=0 603 ){ 604 int i; 605 int once = 1; 606 sqlite3VdbePrintSql(p); 607 if( p->db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeListing ){ 608 printf("VDBE Program Listing:\n"); 609 for(i=0; i<p->nOp; i++){ 610 sqlite3VdbePrintOp(stdout, i, &aOp[i]); 611 } 612 } 613 if( p->db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeEQP ){ 614 for(i=0; i<p->nOp; i++){ 615 if( aOp[i].opcode==OP_Explain ){ 616 if( once ) printf("VDBE Query Plan:\n"); 617 printf("%s\n", aOp[i].p4.z); 618 once = 0; 619 } 620 } 621 } 622 if( p->db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeTrace ) printf("VDBE Trace:\n"); 623 } 624 sqlite3EndBenignMalloc(); 625 #endif 626 for(pOp=&aOp[p->pc]; rc==SQLITE_OK; pOp++){ 627 assert( pOp>=aOp && pOp<&aOp[p->nOp]); 628 if( db->mallocFailed ) goto no_mem; 629 #ifdef VDBE_PROFILE 630 start = sqlite3Hwtime(); 631 #endif 632 nVmStep++; 633 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS 634 if( p->anExec ) p->anExec[(int)(pOp-aOp)]++; 635 #endif 636 637 /* Only allow tracing if SQLITE_DEBUG is defined. 638 */ 639 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 640 if( db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ 641 sqlite3VdbePrintOp(stdout, (int)(pOp - aOp), pOp); 642 } 643 #endif 644 645 646 /* Check to see if we need to simulate an interrupt. This only happens 647 ** if we have a special test build. 648 */ 649 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 650 if( sqlite3_interrupt_count>0 ){ 651 sqlite3_interrupt_count--; 652 if( sqlite3_interrupt_count==0 ){ 653 sqlite3_interrupt(db); 654 } 655 } 656 #endif 657 658 /* Sanity checking on other operands */ 659 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 660 assert( pOp->opflags==sqlite3OpcodeProperty[pOp->opcode] ); 661 if( (pOp->opflags & OPFLG_IN1)!=0 ){ 662 assert( pOp->p1>0 ); 663 assert( pOp->p1<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 664 assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p1]) ); 665 assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(&aMem[pOp->p1]) ); 666 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, &aMem[pOp->p1]); 667 } 668 if( (pOp->opflags & OPFLG_IN2)!=0 ){ 669 assert( pOp->p2>0 ); 670 assert( pOp->p2<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 671 assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p2]) ); 672 assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(&aMem[pOp->p2]) ); 673 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, &aMem[pOp->p2]); 674 } 675 if( (pOp->opflags & OPFLG_IN3)!=0 ){ 676 assert( pOp->p3>0 ); 677 assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 678 assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p3]) ); 679 assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(&aMem[pOp->p3]) ); 680 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, &aMem[pOp->p3]); 681 } 682 if( (pOp->opflags & OPFLG_OUT2)!=0 ){ 683 assert( pOp->p2>0 ); 684 assert( pOp->p2<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 685 memAboutToChange(p, &aMem[pOp->p2]); 686 } 687 if( (pOp->opflags & OPFLG_OUT3)!=0 ){ 688 assert( pOp->p3>0 ); 689 assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 690 memAboutToChange(p, &aMem[pOp->p3]); 691 } 692 #endif 693 #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) || defined(VDBE_PROFILE) 694 pOrigOp = pOp; 695 #endif 696 697 switch( pOp->opcode ){ 698 699 /***************************************************************************** 700 ** What follows is a massive switch statement where each case implements a 701 ** separate instruction in the virtual machine. If we follow the usual 702 ** indentation conventions, each case should be indented by 6 spaces. But 703 ** that is a lot of wasted space on the left margin. So the code within 704 ** the switch statement will break with convention and be flush-left. Another 705 ** big comment (similar to this one) will mark the point in the code where 706 ** we transition back to normal indentation. 707 ** 708 ** The formatting of each case is important. The makefile for SQLite 709 ** generates two C files "opcodes.h" and "opcodes.c" by scanning this 710 ** file looking for lines that begin with "case OP_". The opcodes.h files 711 ** will be filled with #defines that give unique integer values to each 712 ** opcode and the opcodes.c file is filled with an array of strings where 713 ** each string is the symbolic name for the corresponding opcode. If the 714 ** case statement is followed by a comment of the form "/# same as ... #/" 715 ** that comment is used to determine the particular value of the opcode. 716 ** 717 ** Other keywords in the comment that follows each case are used to 718 ** construct the OPFLG_INITIALIZER value that initializes opcodeProperty[]. 719 ** Keywords include: in1, in2, in3, out2, out3. See 720 ** the mkopcodeh.awk script for additional information. 721 ** 722 ** Documentation about VDBE opcodes is generated by scanning this file 723 ** for lines of that contain "Opcode:". That line and all subsequent 724 ** comment lines are used in the generation of the opcode.html documentation 725 ** file. 726 ** 727 ** SUMMARY: 728 ** 729 ** Formatting is important to scripts that scan this file. 730 ** Do not deviate from the formatting style currently in use. 731 ** 732 *****************************************************************************/ 733 734 /* Opcode: Goto * P2 * * * 735 ** 736 ** An unconditional jump to address P2. 737 ** The next instruction executed will be 738 ** the one at index P2 from the beginning of 739 ** the program. 740 ** 741 ** The P1 parameter is not actually used by this opcode. However, it 742 ** is sometimes set to 1 instead of 0 as a hint to the command-line shell 743 ** that this Goto is the bottom of a loop and that the lines from P2 down 744 ** to the current line should be indented for EXPLAIN output. 745 */ 746 case OP_Goto: { /* jump */ 747 jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt: 748 pOp = &aOp[pOp->p2 - 1]; 749 750 /* Opcodes that are used as the bottom of a loop (OP_Next, OP_Prev, 751 ** OP_VNext, OP_RowSetNext, or OP_SorterNext) all jump here upon 752 ** completion. Check to see if sqlite3_interrupt() has been called 753 ** or if the progress callback needs to be invoked. 754 ** 755 ** This code uses unstructured "goto" statements and does not look clean. 756 ** But that is not due to sloppy coding habits. The code is written this 757 ** way for performance, to avoid having to run the interrupt and progress 758 ** checks on every opcode. This helps sqlite3_step() to run about 1.5% 759 ** faster according to "valgrind --tool=cachegrind" */ 760 check_for_interrupt: 761 if( db->u1.isInterrupted ) goto abort_due_to_interrupt; 762 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK 763 /* Call the progress callback if it is configured and the required number 764 ** of VDBE ops have been executed (either since this invocation of 765 ** sqlite3VdbeExec() or since last time the progress callback was called). 766 ** If the progress callback returns non-zero, exit the virtual machine with 767 ** a return code SQLITE_ABORT. 768 */ 769 if( db->xProgress!=0 && nVmStep>=nProgressLimit ){ 770 assert( db->nProgressOps!=0 ); 771 nProgressLimit = nVmStep + db->nProgressOps - (nVmStep%db->nProgressOps); 772 if( db->xProgress(db->pProgressArg) ){ 773 rc = SQLITE_INTERRUPT; 774 goto vdbe_error_halt; 775 } 776 } 777 #endif 778 779 break; 780 } 781 782 /* Opcode: Gosub P1 P2 * * * 783 ** 784 ** Write the current address onto register P1 785 ** and then jump to address P2. 786 */ 787 case OP_Gosub: { /* jump */ 788 assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 789 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 790 assert( VdbeMemDynamic(pIn1)==0 ); 791 memAboutToChange(p, pIn1); 792 pIn1->flags = MEM_Int; 793 pIn1->u.i = (int)(pOp-aOp); 794 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, pIn1); 795 796 /* Most jump operations do a goto to this spot in order to update 797 ** the pOp pointer. */ 798 jump_to_p2: 799 pOp = &aOp[pOp->p2 - 1]; 800 break; 801 } 802 803 /* Opcode: Return P1 * * * * 804 ** 805 ** Jump to the next instruction after the address in register P1. After 806 ** the jump, register P1 becomes undefined. 807 */ 808 case OP_Return: { /* in1 */ 809 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 810 assert( pIn1->flags==MEM_Int ); 811 pOp = &aOp[pIn1->u.i]; 812 pIn1->flags = MEM_Undefined; 813 break; 814 } 815 816 /* Opcode: InitCoroutine P1 P2 P3 * * 817 ** 818 ** Set up register P1 so that it will Yield to the coroutine 819 ** located at address P3. 820 ** 821 ** If P2!=0 then the coroutine implementation immediately follows 822 ** this opcode. So jump over the coroutine implementation to 823 ** address P2. 824 ** 825 ** See also: EndCoroutine 826 */ 827 case OP_InitCoroutine: { /* jump */ 828 assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 829 assert( pOp->p2>=0 && pOp->p2<p->nOp ); 830 assert( pOp->p3>=0 && pOp->p3<p->nOp ); 831 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 832 assert( !VdbeMemDynamic(pOut) ); 833 pOut->u.i = pOp->p3 - 1; 834 pOut->flags = MEM_Int; 835 if( pOp->p2 ) goto jump_to_p2; 836 break; 837 } 838 839 /* Opcode: EndCoroutine P1 * * * * 840 ** 841 ** The instruction at the address in register P1 is a Yield. 842 ** Jump to the P2 parameter of that Yield. 843 ** After the jump, register P1 becomes undefined. 844 ** 845 ** See also: InitCoroutine 846 */ 847 case OP_EndCoroutine: { /* in1 */ 848 VdbeOp *pCaller; 849 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 850 assert( pIn1->flags==MEM_Int ); 851 assert( pIn1->u.i>=0 && pIn1->u.i<p->nOp ); 852 pCaller = &aOp[pIn1->u.i]; 853 assert( pCaller->opcode==OP_Yield ); 854 assert( pCaller->p2>=0 && pCaller->p2<p->nOp ); 855 pOp = &aOp[pCaller->p2 - 1]; 856 pIn1->flags = MEM_Undefined; 857 break; 858 } 859 860 /* Opcode: Yield P1 P2 * * * 861 ** 862 ** Swap the program counter with the value in register P1. This 863 ** has the effect of yielding to a coroutine. 864 ** 865 ** If the coroutine that is launched by this instruction ends with 866 ** Yield or Return then continue to the next instruction. But if 867 ** the coroutine launched by this instruction ends with 868 ** EndCoroutine, then jump to P2 rather than continuing with the 869 ** next instruction. 870 ** 871 ** See also: InitCoroutine 872 */ 873 case OP_Yield: { /* in1, jump */ 874 int pcDest; 875 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 876 assert( VdbeMemDynamic(pIn1)==0 ); 877 pIn1->flags = MEM_Int; 878 pcDest = (int)pIn1->u.i; 879 pIn1->u.i = (int)(pOp - aOp); 880 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, pIn1); 881 pOp = &aOp[pcDest]; 882 break; 883 } 884 885 /* Opcode: HaltIfNull P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 886 ** Synopsis: if r[P3]=null halt 887 ** 888 ** Check the value in register P3. If it is NULL then Halt using 889 ** parameter P1, P2, and P4 as if this were a Halt instruction. If the 890 ** value in register P3 is not NULL, then this routine is a no-op. 891 ** The P5 parameter should be 1. 892 */ 893 case OP_HaltIfNull: { /* in3 */ 894 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 895 if( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ) break; 896 /* Fall through into OP_Halt */ 897 } 898 899 /* Opcode: Halt P1 P2 * P4 P5 900 ** 901 ** Exit immediately. All open cursors, etc are closed 902 ** automatically. 903 ** 904 ** P1 is the result code returned by sqlite3_exec(), sqlite3_reset(), 905 ** or sqlite3_finalize(). For a normal halt, this should be SQLITE_OK (0). 906 ** For errors, it can be some other value. If P1!=0 then P2 will determine 907 ** whether or not to rollback the current transaction. Do not rollback 908 ** if P2==OE_Fail. Do the rollback if P2==OE_Rollback. If P2==OE_Abort, 909 ** then back out all changes that have occurred during this execution of the 910 ** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction. 911 ** 912 ** If P4 is not null then it is an error message string. 913 ** 914 ** P5 is a value between 0 and 4, inclusive, that modifies the P4 string. 915 ** 916 ** 0: (no change) 917 ** 1: NOT NULL contraint failed: P4 918 ** 2: UNIQUE constraint failed: P4 919 ** 3: CHECK constraint failed: P4 920 ** 4: FOREIGN KEY constraint failed: P4 921 ** 922 ** If P5 is not zero and P4 is NULL, then everything after the ":" is 923 ** omitted. 924 ** 925 ** There is an implied "Halt 0 0 0" instruction inserted at the very end of 926 ** every program. So a jump past the last instruction of the program 927 ** is the same as executing Halt. 928 */ 929 case OP_Halt: { 930 const char *zType; 931 const char *zLogFmt; 932 VdbeFrame *pFrame; 933 int pcx; 934 935 pcx = (int)(pOp - aOp); 936 if( pOp->p1==SQLITE_OK && p->pFrame ){ 937 /* Halt the sub-program. Return control to the parent frame. */ 938 pFrame = p->pFrame; 939 p->pFrame = pFrame->pParent; 940 p->nFrame--; 941 sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange); 942 pcx = sqlite3VdbeFrameRestore(pFrame); 943 lastRowid = db->lastRowid; 944 if( pOp->p2==OE_Ignore ){ 945 /* Instruction pcx is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program 946 ** currently being halted. If the p2 instruction of this OP_Halt 947 ** instruction is set to OE_Ignore, then the sub-program is throwing 948 ** an IGNORE exception. In this case jump to the address specified 949 ** as the p2 of the calling OP_Program. */ 950 pcx = p->aOp[pcx].p2-1; 951 } 952 aOp = p->aOp; 953 aMem = p->aMem; 954 pOp = &aOp[pcx]; 955 break; 956 } 957 p->rc = pOp->p1; 958 p->errorAction = (u8)pOp->p2; 959 p->pc = pcx; 960 if( p->rc ){ 961 if( pOp->p5 ){ 962 static const char * const azType[] = { "NOT NULL", "UNIQUE", "CHECK", 963 "FOREIGN KEY" }; 964 assert( pOp->p5>=1 && pOp->p5<=4 ); 965 testcase( pOp->p5==1 ); 966 testcase( pOp->p5==2 ); 967 testcase( pOp->p5==3 ); 968 testcase( pOp->p5==4 ); 969 zType = azType[pOp->p5-1]; 970 }else{ 971 zType = 0; 972 } 973 assert( zType!=0 || pOp->p4.z!=0 ); 974 zLogFmt = "abort at %d in [%s]: %s"; 975 if( zType && pOp->p4.z ){ 976 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s constraint failed: %s", zType, pOp->p4.z); 977 }else if( pOp->p4.z ){ 978 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", pOp->p4.z); 979 }else{ 980 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s constraint failed", zType); 981 } 982 sqlite3_log(pOp->p1, zLogFmt, pcx, p->zSql, p->zErrMsg); 983 } 984 rc = sqlite3VdbeHalt(p); 985 assert( rc==SQLITE_BUSY || rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_ERROR ); 986 if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){ 987 p->rc = rc = SQLITE_BUSY; 988 }else{ 989 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->rc&0xff)==SQLITE_CONSTRAINT ); 990 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || db->nDeferredCons>0 || db->nDeferredImmCons>0 ); 991 rc = p->rc ? SQLITE_ERROR : SQLITE_DONE; 992 } 993 goto vdbe_return; 994 } 995 996 /* Opcode: Integer P1 P2 * * * 997 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=P1 998 ** 999 ** The 32-bit integer value P1 is written into register P2. 1000 */ 1001 case OP_Integer: { /* out2 */ 1002 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 1003 pOut->u.i = pOp->p1; 1004 break; 1005 } 1006 1007 /* Opcode: Int64 * P2 * P4 * 1008 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=P4 1009 ** 1010 ** P4 is a pointer to a 64-bit integer value. 1011 ** Write that value into register P2. 1012 */ 1013 case OP_Int64: { /* out2 */ 1014 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 1015 assert( pOp->p4.pI64!=0 ); 1016 pOut->u.i = *pOp->p4.pI64; 1017 break; 1018 } 1019 1020 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT 1021 /* Opcode: Real * P2 * P4 * 1022 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=P4 1023 ** 1024 ** P4 is a pointer to a 64-bit floating point value. 1025 ** Write that value into register P2. 1026 */ 1027 case OP_Real: { /* same as TK_FLOAT, out2 */ 1028 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 1029 pOut->flags = MEM_Real; 1030 assert( !sqlite3IsNaN(*pOp->p4.pReal) ); 1031 pOut->u.r = *pOp->p4.pReal; 1032 break; 1033 } 1034 #endif 1035 1036 /* Opcode: String8 * P2 * P4 * 1037 ** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4' 1038 ** 1039 ** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed 1040 ** into a String opcode before it is executed for the first time. During 1041 ** this transformation, the length of string P4 is computed and stored 1042 ** as the P1 parameter. 1043 */ 1044 case OP_String8: { /* same as TK_STRING, out2 */ 1045 assert( pOp->p4.z!=0 ); 1046 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 1047 pOp->opcode = OP_String; 1048 pOp->p1 = sqlite3Strlen30(pOp->p4.z); 1049 1050 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 1051 if( encoding!=SQLITE_UTF8 ){ 1052 rc = sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pOut, pOp->p4.z, -1, SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC); 1053 if( rc==SQLITE_TOOBIG ) goto too_big; 1054 if( SQLITE_OK!=sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pOut, encoding) ) goto no_mem; 1055 assert( pOut->szMalloc>0 && pOut->zMalloc==pOut->z ); 1056 assert( VdbeMemDynamic(pOut)==0 ); 1057 pOut->szMalloc = 0; 1058 pOut->flags |= MEM_Static; 1059 if( pOp->p4type==P4_DYNAMIC ){ 1060 sqlite3DbFree(db, pOp->p4.z); 1061 } 1062 pOp->p4type = P4_DYNAMIC; 1063 pOp->p4.z = pOut->z; 1064 pOp->p1 = pOut->n; 1065 } 1066 #endif 1067 if( pOp->p1>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){ 1068 goto too_big; 1069 } 1070 /* Fall through to the next case, OP_String */ 1071 } 1072 1073 /* Opcode: String P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1074 ** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4' (len=P1) 1075 ** 1076 ** The string value P4 of length P1 (bytes) is stored in register P2. 1077 ** 1078 ** If P5!=0 and the content of register P3 is greater than zero, then 1079 ** the datatype of the register P2 is converted to BLOB. The content is 1080 ** the same sequence of bytes, it is merely interpreted as a BLOB instead 1081 ** of a string, as if it had been CAST. 1082 */ 1083 case OP_String: { /* out2 */ 1084 assert( pOp->p4.z!=0 ); 1085 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 1086 pOut->flags = MEM_Str|MEM_Static|MEM_Term; 1087 pOut->z = pOp->p4.z; 1088 pOut->n = pOp->p1; 1089 pOut->enc = encoding; 1090 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); 1091 #ifndef SQLITE_LIKE_DOESNT_MATCH_BLOBS 1092 if( pOp->p5 ){ 1093 assert( pOp->p3>0 ); 1094 assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 1095 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 1096 assert( pIn3->flags & MEM_Int ); 1097 if( pIn3->u.i ) pOut->flags = MEM_Blob|MEM_Static|MEM_Term; 1098 } 1099 #endif 1100 break; 1101 } 1102 1103 /* Opcode: Null P1 P2 P3 * * 1104 ** Synopsis: r[P2..P3]=NULL 1105 ** 1106 ** Write a NULL into registers P2. If P3 greater than P2, then also write 1107 ** NULL into register P3 and every register in between P2 and P3. If P3 1108 ** is less than P2 (typically P3 is zero) then only register P2 is 1109 ** set to NULL. 1110 ** 1111 ** If the P1 value is non-zero, then also set the MEM_Cleared flag so that 1112 ** NULL values will not compare equal even if SQLITE_NULLEQ is set on 1113 ** OP_Ne or OP_Eq. 1114 */ 1115 case OP_Null: { /* out2 */ 1116 int cnt; 1117 u16 nullFlag; 1118 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 1119 cnt = pOp->p3-pOp->p2; 1120 assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 1121 pOut->flags = nullFlag = pOp->p1 ? (MEM_Null|MEM_Cleared) : MEM_Null; 1122 while( cnt>0 ){ 1123 pOut++; 1124 memAboutToChange(p, pOut); 1125 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); 1126 pOut->flags = nullFlag; 1127 cnt--; 1128 } 1129 break; 1130 } 1131 1132 /* Opcode: SoftNull P1 * * * * 1133 ** Synopsis: r[P1]=NULL 1134 ** 1135 ** Set register P1 to have the value NULL as seen by the OP_MakeRecord 1136 ** instruction, but do not free any string or blob memory associated with 1137 ** the register, so that if the value was a string or blob that was 1138 ** previously copied using OP_SCopy, the copies will continue to be valid. 1139 */ 1140 case OP_SoftNull: { 1141 assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 1142 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1143 pOut->flags = (pOut->flags|MEM_Null)&~MEM_Undefined; 1144 break; 1145 } 1146 1147 /* Opcode: Blob P1 P2 * P4 * 1148 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=P4 (len=P1) 1149 ** 1150 ** P4 points to a blob of data P1 bytes long. Store this 1151 ** blob in register P2. 1152 */ 1153 case OP_Blob: { /* out2 */ 1154 assert( pOp->p1 <= SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH ); 1155 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 1156 sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pOut, pOp->p4.z, pOp->p1, 0, 0); 1157 pOut->enc = encoding; 1158 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); 1159 break; 1160 } 1161 1162 /* Opcode: Variable P1 P2 * P4 * 1163 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=parameter(P1,P4) 1164 ** 1165 ** Transfer the values of bound parameter P1 into register P2 1166 ** 1167 ** If the parameter is named, then its name appears in P4. 1168 ** The P4 value is used by sqlite3_bind_parameter_name(). 1169 */ 1170 case OP_Variable: { /* out2 */ 1171 Mem *pVar; /* Value being transferred */ 1172 1173 assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=p->nVar ); 1174 assert( pOp->p4.z==0 || pOp->p4.z==p->azVar[pOp->p1-1] ); 1175 pVar = &p->aVar[pOp->p1 - 1]; 1176 if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pVar) ){ 1177 goto too_big; 1178 } 1179 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 1180 sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pVar, MEM_Static); 1181 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); 1182 break; 1183 } 1184 1185 /* Opcode: Move P1 P2 P3 * * 1186 ** Synopsis: r[P2@P3]=r[P1@P3] 1187 ** 1188 ** Move the P3 values in register P1..P1+P3-1 over into 1189 ** registers P2..P2+P3-1. Registers P1..P1+P3-1 are 1190 ** left holding a NULL. It is an error for register ranges 1191 ** P1..P1+P3-1 and P2..P2+P3-1 to overlap. It is an error 1192 ** for P3 to be less than 1. 1193 */ 1194 case OP_Move: { 1195 int n; /* Number of registers left to copy */ 1196 int p1; /* Register to copy from */ 1197 int p2; /* Register to copy to */ 1198 1199 n = pOp->p3; 1200 p1 = pOp->p1; 1201 p2 = pOp->p2; 1202 assert( n>0 && p1>0 && p2>0 ); 1203 assert( p1+n<=p2 || p2+n<=p1 ); 1204 1205 pIn1 = &aMem[p1]; 1206 pOut = &aMem[p2]; 1207 do{ 1208 assert( pOut<=&aMem[(p->nMem-p->nCursor)] ); 1209 assert( pIn1<=&aMem[(p->nMem-p->nCursor)] ); 1210 assert( memIsValid(pIn1) ); 1211 memAboutToChange(p, pOut); 1212 sqlite3VdbeMemMove(pOut, pIn1); 1213 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 1214 if( pOut->pScopyFrom>=&aMem[p1] && pOut->pScopyFrom<pOut ){ 1215 pOut->pScopyFrom += pOp->p2 - p1; 1216 } 1217 #endif 1218 Deephemeralize(pOut); 1219 REGISTER_TRACE(p2++, pOut); 1220 pIn1++; 1221 pOut++; 1222 }while( --n ); 1223 break; 1224 } 1225 1226 /* Opcode: Copy P1 P2 P3 * * 1227 ** Synopsis: r[P2@P3+1]=r[P1@P3+1] 1228 ** 1229 ** Make a copy of registers P1..P1+P3 into registers P2..P2+P3. 1230 ** 1231 ** This instruction makes a deep copy of the value. A duplicate 1232 ** is made of any string or blob constant. See also OP_SCopy. 1233 */ 1234 case OP_Copy: { 1235 int n; 1236 1237 n = pOp->p3; 1238 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1239 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 1240 assert( pOut!=pIn1 ); 1241 while( 1 ){ 1242 sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn1, MEM_Ephem); 1243 Deephemeralize(pOut); 1244 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 1245 pOut->pScopyFrom = 0; 1246 #endif 1247 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2+pOp->p3-n, pOut); 1248 if( (n--)==0 ) break; 1249 pOut++; 1250 pIn1++; 1251 } 1252 break; 1253 } 1254 1255 /* Opcode: SCopy P1 P2 * * * 1256 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=r[P1] 1257 ** 1258 ** Make a shallow copy of register P1 into register P2. 1259 ** 1260 ** This instruction makes a shallow copy of the value. If the value 1261 ** is a string or blob, then the copy is only a pointer to the 1262 ** original and hence if the original changes so will the copy. 1263 ** Worse, if the original is deallocated, the copy becomes invalid. 1264 ** Thus the program must guarantee that the original will not change 1265 ** during the lifetime of the copy. Use OP_Copy to make a complete 1266 ** copy. 1267 */ 1268 case OP_SCopy: { /* out2 */ 1269 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1270 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 1271 assert( pOut!=pIn1 ); 1272 sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn1, MEM_Ephem); 1273 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 1274 if( pOut->pScopyFrom==0 ) pOut->pScopyFrom = pIn1; 1275 #endif 1276 break; 1277 } 1278 1279 /* Opcode: IntCopy P1 P2 * * * 1280 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=r[P1] 1281 ** 1282 ** Transfer the integer value held in register P1 into register P2. 1283 ** 1284 ** This is an optimized version of SCopy that works only for integer 1285 ** values. 1286 */ 1287 case OP_IntCopy: { /* out2 */ 1288 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1289 assert( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ); 1290 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 1291 sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pOut, pIn1->u.i); 1292 break; 1293 } 1294 1295 /* Opcode: ResultRow P1 P2 * * * 1296 ** Synopsis: output=r[P1@P2] 1297 ** 1298 ** The registers P1 through P1+P2-1 contain a single row of 1299 ** results. This opcode causes the sqlite3_step() call to terminate 1300 ** with an SQLITE_ROW return code and it sets up the sqlite3_stmt 1301 ** structure to provide access to the r(P1)..r(P1+P2-1) values as 1302 ** the result row. 1303 */ 1304 case OP_ResultRow: { 1305 Mem *pMem; 1306 int i; 1307 assert( p->nResColumn==pOp->p2 ); 1308 assert( pOp->p1>0 ); 1309 assert( pOp->p1+pOp->p2<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor)+1 ); 1310 1311 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK 1312 /* Run the progress counter just before returning. 1313 */ 1314 if( db->xProgress!=0 1315 && nVmStep>=nProgressLimit 1316 && db->xProgress(db->pProgressArg)!=0 1317 ){ 1318 rc = SQLITE_INTERRUPT; 1319 goto vdbe_error_halt; 1320 } 1321 #endif 1322 1323 /* If this statement has violated immediate foreign key constraints, do 1324 ** not return the number of rows modified. And do not RELEASE the statement 1325 ** transaction. It needs to be rolled back. */ 1326 if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 0)) ){ 1327 assert( db->flags&SQLITE_CountRows ); 1328 assert( p->usesStmtJournal ); 1329 break; 1330 } 1331 1332 /* If the SQLITE_CountRows flag is set in sqlite3.flags mask, then 1333 ** DML statements invoke this opcode to return the number of rows 1334 ** modified to the user. This is the only way that a VM that 1335 ** opens a statement transaction may invoke this opcode. 1336 ** 1337 ** In case this is such a statement, close any statement transaction 1338 ** opened by this VM before returning control to the user. This is to 1339 ** ensure that statement-transactions are always nested, not overlapping. 1340 ** If the open statement-transaction is not closed here, then the user 1341 ** may step another VM that opens its own statement transaction. This 1342 ** may lead to overlapping statement transactions. 1343 ** 1344 ** The statement transaction is never a top-level transaction. Hence 1345 ** the RELEASE call below can never fail. 1346 */ 1347 assert( p->iStatement==0 || db->flags&SQLITE_CountRows ); 1348 rc = sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement(p, SAVEPOINT_RELEASE); 1349 if( NEVER(rc!=SQLITE_OK) ){ 1350 break; 1351 } 1352 1353 /* Invalidate all ephemeral cursor row caches */ 1354 p->cacheCtr = (p->cacheCtr + 2)|1; 1355 1356 /* Make sure the results of the current row are \000 terminated 1357 ** and have an assigned type. The results are de-ephemeralized as 1358 ** a side effect. 1359 */ 1360 pMem = p->pResultSet = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1361 for(i=0; i<pOp->p2; i++){ 1362 assert( memIsValid(&pMem[i]) ); 1363 Deephemeralize(&pMem[i]); 1364 assert( (pMem[i].flags & MEM_Ephem)==0 1365 || (pMem[i].flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))==0 ); 1366 sqlite3VdbeMemNulTerminate(&pMem[i]); 1367 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1+i, &pMem[i]); 1368 } 1369 if( db->mallocFailed ) goto no_mem; 1370 1371 /* Return SQLITE_ROW 1372 */ 1373 p->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp) + 1; 1374 rc = SQLITE_ROW; 1375 goto vdbe_return; 1376 } 1377 1378 /* Opcode: Concat P1 P2 P3 * * 1379 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]+r[P1] 1380 ** 1381 ** Add the text in register P1 onto the end of the text in 1382 ** register P2 and store the result in register P3. 1383 ** If either the P1 or P2 text are NULL then store NULL in P3. 1384 ** 1385 ** P3 = P2 || P1 1386 ** 1387 ** It is illegal for P1 and P3 to be the same register. Sometimes, 1388 ** if P3 is the same register as P2, the implementation is able 1389 ** to avoid a memcpy(). 1390 */ 1391 case OP_Concat: { /* same as TK_CONCAT, in1, in2, out3 */ 1392 i64 nByte; 1393 1394 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1395 pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 1396 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 1397 assert( pIn1!=pOut ); 1398 if( (pIn1->flags | pIn2->flags) & MEM_Null ){ 1399 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); 1400 break; 1401 } 1402 if( ExpandBlob(pIn1) || ExpandBlob(pIn2) ) goto no_mem; 1403 Stringify(pIn1, encoding); 1404 Stringify(pIn2, encoding); 1405 nByte = pIn1->n + pIn2->n; 1406 if( nByte>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){ 1407 goto too_big; 1408 } 1409 if( sqlite3VdbeMemGrow(pOut, (int)nByte+2, pOut==pIn2) ){ 1410 goto no_mem; 1411 } 1412 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Str); 1413 if( pOut!=pIn2 ){ 1414 memcpy(pOut->z, pIn2->z, pIn2->n); 1415 } 1416 memcpy(&pOut->z[pIn2->n], pIn1->z, pIn1->n); 1417 pOut->z[nByte]=0; 1418 pOut->z[nByte+1] = 0; 1419 pOut->flags |= MEM_Term; 1420 pOut->n = (int)nByte; 1421 pOut->enc = encoding; 1422 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); 1423 break; 1424 } 1425 1426 /* Opcode: Add P1 P2 P3 * * 1427 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P1]+r[P2] 1428 ** 1429 ** Add the value in register P1 to the value in register P2 1430 ** and store the result in register P3. 1431 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. 1432 */ 1433 /* Opcode: Multiply P1 P2 P3 * * 1434 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P1]*r[P2] 1435 ** 1436 ** 1437 ** Multiply the value in register P1 by the value in register P2 1438 ** and store the result in register P3. 1439 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. 1440 */ 1441 /* Opcode: Subtract P1 P2 P3 * * 1442 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]-r[P1] 1443 ** 1444 ** Subtract the value in register P1 from the value in register P2 1445 ** and store the result in register P3. 1446 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. 1447 */ 1448 /* Opcode: Divide P1 P2 P3 * * 1449 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]/r[P1] 1450 ** 1451 ** Divide the value in register P1 by the value in register P2 1452 ** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in 1453 ** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is 1454 ** NULL, the result is NULL. 1455 */ 1456 /* Opcode: Remainder P1 P2 P3 * * 1457 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]%r[P1] 1458 ** 1459 ** Compute the remainder after integer register P2 is divided by 1460 ** register P1 and store the result in register P3. 1461 ** If the value in register P1 is zero the result is NULL. 1462 ** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL. 1463 */ 1464 case OP_Add: /* same as TK_PLUS, in1, in2, out3 */ 1465 case OP_Subtract: /* same as TK_MINUS, in1, in2, out3 */ 1466 case OP_Multiply: /* same as TK_STAR, in1, in2, out3 */ 1467 case OP_Divide: /* same as TK_SLASH, in1, in2, out3 */ 1468 case OP_Remainder: { /* same as TK_REM, in1, in2, out3 */ 1469 char bIntint; /* Started out as two integer operands */ 1470 u16 flags; /* Combined MEM_* flags from both inputs */ 1471 u16 type1; /* Numeric type of left operand */ 1472 u16 type2; /* Numeric type of right operand */ 1473 i64 iA; /* Integer value of left operand */ 1474 i64 iB; /* Integer value of right operand */ 1475 double rA; /* Real value of left operand */ 1476 double rB; /* Real value of right operand */ 1477 1478 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1479 type1 = numericType(pIn1); 1480 pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 1481 type2 = numericType(pIn2); 1482 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 1483 flags = pIn1->flags | pIn2->flags; 1484 if( (flags & MEM_Null)!=0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null; 1485 if( (type1 & type2 & MEM_Int)!=0 ){ 1486 iA = pIn1->u.i; 1487 iB = pIn2->u.i; 1488 bIntint = 1; 1489 switch( pOp->opcode ){ 1490 case OP_Add: if( sqlite3AddInt64(&iB,iA) ) goto fp_math; break; 1491 case OP_Subtract: if( sqlite3SubInt64(&iB,iA) ) goto fp_math; break; 1492 case OP_Multiply: if( sqlite3MulInt64(&iB,iA) ) goto fp_math; break; 1493 case OP_Divide: { 1494 if( iA==0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null; 1495 if( iA==-1 && iB==SMALLEST_INT64 ) goto fp_math; 1496 iB /= iA; 1497 break; 1498 } 1499 default: { 1500 if( iA==0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null; 1501 if( iA==-1 ) iA = 1; 1502 iB %= iA; 1503 break; 1504 } 1505 } 1506 pOut->u.i = iB; 1507 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int); 1508 }else{ 1509 bIntint = 0; 1510 fp_math: 1511 rA = sqlite3VdbeRealValue(pIn1); 1512 rB = sqlite3VdbeRealValue(pIn2); 1513 switch( pOp->opcode ){ 1514 case OP_Add: rB += rA; break; 1515 case OP_Subtract: rB -= rA; break; 1516 case OP_Multiply: rB *= rA; break; 1517 case OP_Divide: { 1518 /* (double)0 In case of SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT... */ 1519 if( rA==(double)0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null; 1520 rB /= rA; 1521 break; 1522 } 1523 default: { 1524 iA = (i64)rA; 1525 iB = (i64)rB; 1526 if( iA==0 ) goto arithmetic_result_is_null; 1527 if( iA==-1 ) iA = 1; 1528 rB = (double)(iB % iA); 1529 break; 1530 } 1531 } 1532 #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT 1533 pOut->u.i = rB; 1534 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int); 1535 #else 1536 if( sqlite3IsNaN(rB) ){ 1537 goto arithmetic_result_is_null; 1538 } 1539 pOut->u.r = rB; 1540 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Real); 1541 if( ((type1|type2)&MEM_Real)==0 && !bIntint ){ 1542 sqlite3VdbeIntegerAffinity(pOut); 1543 } 1544 #endif 1545 } 1546 break; 1547 1548 arithmetic_result_is_null: 1549 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); 1550 break; 1551 } 1552 1553 /* Opcode: CollSeq P1 * * P4 1554 ** 1555 ** P4 is a pointer to a CollSeq struct. If the next call to a user function 1556 ** or aggregate calls sqlite3GetFuncCollSeq(), this collation sequence will 1557 ** be returned. This is used by the built-in min(), max() and nullif() 1558 ** functions. 1559 ** 1560 ** If P1 is not zero, then it is a register that a subsequent min() or 1561 ** max() aggregate will set to 1 if the current row is not the minimum or 1562 ** maximum. The P1 register is initialized to 0 by this instruction. 1563 ** 1564 ** The interface used by the implementation of the aforementioned functions 1565 ** to retrieve the collation sequence set by this opcode is not available 1566 ** publicly. Only built-in functions have access to this feature. 1567 */ 1568 case OP_CollSeq: { 1569 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_COLLSEQ ); 1570 if( pOp->p1 ){ 1571 sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(&aMem[pOp->p1], 0); 1572 } 1573 break; 1574 } 1575 1576 /* Opcode: Function0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1577 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=func(r[P2@P5]) 1578 ** 1579 ** Invoke a user function (P4 is a pointer to a FuncDef object that 1580 ** defines the function) with P5 arguments taken from register P2 and 1581 ** successors. The result of the function is stored in register P3. 1582 ** Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs. 1583 ** 1584 ** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the 1585 ** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first 1586 ** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine 1587 ** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the 1588 ** sqlite3_set_auxdata() API may be safely retained until the next 1589 ** invocation of this opcode. 1590 ** 1591 ** See also: Function, AggStep, AggFinal 1592 */ 1593 /* Opcode: Function P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1594 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=func(r[P2@P5]) 1595 ** 1596 ** Invoke a user function (P4 is a pointer to an sqlite3_context object that 1597 ** contains a pointer to the function to be run) with P5 arguments taken 1598 ** from register P2 and successors. The result of the function is stored 1599 ** in register P3. Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs. 1600 ** 1601 ** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the 1602 ** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first 1603 ** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine 1604 ** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the 1605 ** sqlite3_set_auxdata() API may be safely retained until the next 1606 ** invocation of this opcode. 1607 ** 1608 ** SQL functions are initially coded as OP_Function0 with P4 pointing 1609 ** to a FuncDef object. But on first evaluation, the P4 operand is 1610 ** automatically converted into an sqlite3_context object and the operation 1611 ** changed to this OP_Function opcode. In this way, the initialization of 1612 ** the sqlite3_context object occurs only once, rather than once for each 1613 ** evaluation of the function. 1614 ** 1615 ** See also: Function0, AggStep, AggFinal 1616 */ 1617 case OP_Function0: { 1618 int n; 1619 sqlite3_context *pCtx; 1620 1621 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_FUNCDEF ); 1622 n = pOp->p5; 1623 assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 1624 assert( n==0 || (pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2+n<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor)+1) ); 1625 assert( pOp->p3<pOp->p2 || pOp->p3>=pOp->p2+n ); 1626 pCtx = sqlite3DbMallocRaw(db, sizeof(*pCtx) + (n-1)*sizeof(sqlite3_value*)); 1627 if( pCtx==0 ) goto no_mem; 1628 pCtx->pOut = 0; 1629 pCtx->pFunc = pOp->p4.pFunc; 1630 pCtx->iOp = (int)(pOp - aOp); 1631 pCtx->pVdbe = p; 1632 pCtx->argc = n; 1633 pOp->p4type = P4_FUNCCTX; 1634 pOp->p4.pCtx = pCtx; 1635 pOp->opcode = OP_Function; 1636 /* Fall through into OP_Function */ 1637 } 1638 case OP_Function: { 1639 int i; 1640 sqlite3_context *pCtx; 1641 1642 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_FUNCCTX ); 1643 pCtx = pOp->p4.pCtx; 1644 1645 /* If this function is inside of a trigger, the register array in aMem[] 1646 ** might change from one evaluation to the next. The next block of code 1647 ** checks to see if the register array has changed, and if so it 1648 ** reinitializes the relavant parts of the sqlite3_context object */ 1649 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 1650 if( pCtx->pOut != pOut ){ 1651 pCtx->pOut = pOut; 1652 for(i=pCtx->argc-1; i>=0; i--) pCtx->argv[i] = &aMem[pOp->p2+i]; 1653 } 1654 1655 memAboutToChange(p, pCtx->pOut); 1656 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 1657 for(i=0; i<pCtx->argc; i++){ 1658 assert( memIsValid(pCtx->argv[i]) ); 1659 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2+i, pCtx->argv[i]); 1660 } 1661 #endif 1662 MemSetTypeFlag(pCtx->pOut, MEM_Null); 1663 pCtx->fErrorOrAux = 0; 1664 db->lastRowid = lastRowid; 1665 (*pCtx->pFunc->xFunc)(pCtx, pCtx->argc, pCtx->argv); /* IMP: R-24505-23230 */ 1666 lastRowid = db->lastRowid; /* Remember rowid changes made by xFunc */ 1667 1668 /* If the function returned an error, throw an exception */ 1669 if( pCtx->fErrorOrAux ){ 1670 if( pCtx->isError ){ 1671 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3_value_text(pCtx->pOut)); 1672 rc = pCtx->isError; 1673 } 1674 sqlite3VdbeDeleteAuxData(p, pCtx->iOp, pOp->p1); 1675 } 1676 1677 /* Copy the result of the function into register P3 */ 1678 if( pOut->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob) ){ 1679 sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pCtx->pOut, encoding); 1680 if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pCtx->pOut) ) goto too_big; 1681 } 1682 1683 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pCtx->pOut); 1684 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pCtx->pOut); 1685 break; 1686 } 1687 1688 /* Opcode: BitAnd P1 P2 P3 * * 1689 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P1]&r[P2] 1690 ** 1691 ** Take the bit-wise AND of the values in register P1 and P2 and 1692 ** store the result in register P3. 1693 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. 1694 */ 1695 /* Opcode: BitOr P1 P2 P3 * * 1696 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P1]|r[P2] 1697 ** 1698 ** Take the bit-wise OR of the values in register P1 and P2 and 1699 ** store the result in register P3. 1700 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. 1701 */ 1702 /* Opcode: ShiftLeft P1 P2 P3 * * 1703 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]<<r[P1] 1704 ** 1705 ** Shift the integer value in register P2 to the left by the 1706 ** number of bits specified by the integer in register P1. 1707 ** Store the result in register P3. 1708 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. 1709 */ 1710 /* Opcode: ShiftRight P1 P2 P3 * * 1711 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]>>r[P1] 1712 ** 1713 ** Shift the integer value in register P2 to the right by the 1714 ** number of bits specified by the integer in register P1. 1715 ** Store the result in register P3. 1716 ** If either input is NULL, the result is NULL. 1717 */ 1718 case OP_BitAnd: /* same as TK_BITAND, in1, in2, out3 */ 1719 case OP_BitOr: /* same as TK_BITOR, in1, in2, out3 */ 1720 case OP_ShiftLeft: /* same as TK_LSHIFT, in1, in2, out3 */ 1721 case OP_ShiftRight: { /* same as TK_RSHIFT, in1, in2, out3 */ 1722 i64 iA; 1723 u64 uA; 1724 i64 iB; 1725 u8 op; 1726 1727 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1728 pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 1729 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 1730 if( (pIn1->flags | pIn2->flags) & MEM_Null ){ 1731 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); 1732 break; 1733 } 1734 iA = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn2); 1735 iB = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1); 1736 op = pOp->opcode; 1737 if( op==OP_BitAnd ){ 1738 iA &= iB; 1739 }else if( op==OP_BitOr ){ 1740 iA |= iB; 1741 }else if( iB!=0 ){ 1742 assert( op==OP_ShiftRight || op==OP_ShiftLeft ); 1743 1744 /* If shifting by a negative amount, shift in the other direction */ 1745 if( iB<0 ){ 1746 assert( OP_ShiftRight==OP_ShiftLeft+1 ); 1747 op = 2*OP_ShiftLeft + 1 - op; 1748 iB = iB>(-64) ? -iB : 64; 1749 } 1750 1751 if( iB>=64 ){ 1752 iA = (iA>=0 || op==OP_ShiftLeft) ? 0 : -1; 1753 }else{ 1754 memcpy(&uA, &iA, sizeof(uA)); 1755 if( op==OP_ShiftLeft ){ 1756 uA <<= iB; 1757 }else{ 1758 uA >>= iB; 1759 /* Sign-extend on a right shift of a negative number */ 1760 if( iA<0 ) uA |= ((((u64)0xffffffff)<<32)|0xffffffff) << (64-iB); 1761 } 1762 memcpy(&iA, &uA, sizeof(iA)); 1763 } 1764 } 1765 pOut->u.i = iA; 1766 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int); 1767 break; 1768 } 1769 1770 /* Opcode: AddImm P1 P2 * * * 1771 ** Synopsis: r[P1]=r[P1]+P2 1772 ** 1773 ** Add the constant P2 to the value in register P1. 1774 ** The result is always an integer. 1775 ** 1776 ** To force any register to be an integer, just add 0. 1777 */ 1778 case OP_AddImm: { /* in1 */ 1779 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1780 memAboutToChange(p, pIn1); 1781 sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn1); 1782 pIn1->u.i += pOp->p2; 1783 break; 1784 } 1785 1786 /* Opcode: MustBeInt P1 P2 * * * 1787 ** 1788 ** Force the value in register P1 to be an integer. If the value 1789 ** in P1 is not an integer and cannot be converted into an integer 1790 ** without data loss, then jump immediately to P2, or if P2==0 1791 ** raise an SQLITE_MISMATCH exception. 1792 */ 1793 case OP_MustBeInt: { /* jump, in1 */ 1794 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1795 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){ 1796 applyAffinity(pIn1, SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC, encoding); 1797 VdbeBranchTaken((pIn1->flags&MEM_Int)==0, 2); 1798 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){ 1799 if( pOp->p2==0 ){ 1800 rc = SQLITE_MISMATCH; 1801 goto abort_due_to_error; 1802 }else{ 1803 goto jump_to_p2; 1804 } 1805 } 1806 } 1807 MemSetTypeFlag(pIn1, MEM_Int); 1808 break; 1809 } 1810 1811 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT 1812 /* Opcode: RealAffinity P1 * * * * 1813 ** 1814 ** If register P1 holds an integer convert it to a real value. 1815 ** 1816 ** This opcode is used when extracting information from a column that 1817 ** has REAL affinity. Such column values may still be stored as 1818 ** integers, for space efficiency, but after extraction we want them 1819 ** to have only a real value. 1820 */ 1821 case OP_RealAffinity: { /* in1 */ 1822 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1823 if( pIn1->flags & MEM_Int ){ 1824 sqlite3VdbeMemRealify(pIn1); 1825 } 1826 break; 1827 } 1828 #endif 1829 1830 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CAST 1831 /* Opcode: Cast P1 P2 * * * 1832 ** Synopsis: affinity(r[P1]) 1833 ** 1834 ** Force the value in register P1 to be the type defined by P2. 1835 ** 1836 ** <ul> 1837 ** <li value="97"> TEXT 1838 ** <li value="98"> BLOB 1839 ** <li value="99"> NUMERIC 1840 ** <li value="100"> INTEGER 1841 ** <li value="101"> REAL 1842 ** </ul> 1843 ** 1844 ** A NULL value is not changed by this routine. It remains NULL. 1845 */ 1846 case OP_Cast: { /* in1 */ 1847 assert( pOp->p2>=SQLITE_AFF_BLOB && pOp->p2<=SQLITE_AFF_REAL ); 1848 testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ); 1849 testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_BLOB ); 1850 testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ); 1851 testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER ); 1852 testcase( pOp->p2==SQLITE_AFF_REAL ); 1853 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1854 memAboutToChange(p, pIn1); 1855 rc = ExpandBlob(pIn1); 1856 sqlite3VdbeMemCast(pIn1, pOp->p2, encoding); 1857 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pIn1); 1858 break; 1859 } 1860 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_CAST */ 1861 1862 /* Opcode: Lt P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1863 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]<r[P3] goto P2 1864 ** 1865 ** Compare the values in register P1 and P3. If reg(P3)<reg(P1) then 1866 ** jump to address P2. 1867 ** 1868 ** If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL bit of P5 is set and either reg(P1) or 1869 ** reg(P3) is NULL then take the jump. If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL 1870 ** bit is clear then fall through if either operand is NULL. 1871 ** 1872 ** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character - 1873 ** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made 1874 ** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the 1875 ** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric 1876 ** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored 1877 ** back into the input registers P1 and P3. So this opcode can cause 1878 ** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3. 1879 ** 1880 ** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL, 1881 ** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is 1882 ** used to determine the results of the comparison. If both values 1883 ** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in 1884 ** P4 is used to do the comparison. If P4 is not specified then 1885 ** memcmp() is used to compare text string. If both values are 1886 ** numeric, then a numeric comparison is used. If the two values 1887 ** are of different types, then numbers are considered less than 1888 ** strings and strings are considered less than blobs. 1889 ** 1890 ** If the SQLITE_STOREP2 bit of P5 is set, then do not jump. Instead, 1891 ** store a boolean result (either 0, or 1, or NULL) in register P2. 1892 ** 1893 ** If the SQLITE_NULLEQ bit is set in P5, then NULL values are considered 1894 ** equal to one another, provided that they do not have their MEM_Cleared 1895 ** bit set. 1896 */ 1897 /* Opcode: Ne P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1898 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=r[P3] goto P2 1899 ** 1900 ** This works just like the Lt opcode except that the jump is taken if 1901 ** the operands in registers P1 and P3 are not equal. See the Lt opcode for 1902 ** additional information. 1903 ** 1904 ** If SQLITE_NULLEQ is set in P5 then the result of comparison is always either 1905 ** true or false and is never NULL. If both operands are NULL then the result 1906 ** of comparison is false. If either operand is NULL then the result is true. 1907 ** If neither operand is NULL the result is the same as it would be if 1908 ** the SQLITE_NULLEQ flag were omitted from P5. 1909 */ 1910 /* Opcode: Eq P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1911 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]==r[P3] goto P2 1912 ** 1913 ** This works just like the Lt opcode except that the jump is taken if 1914 ** the operands in registers P1 and P3 are equal. 1915 ** See the Lt opcode for additional information. 1916 ** 1917 ** If SQLITE_NULLEQ is set in P5 then the result of comparison is always either 1918 ** true or false and is never NULL. If both operands are NULL then the result 1919 ** of comparison is true. If either operand is NULL then the result is false. 1920 ** If neither operand is NULL the result is the same as it would be if 1921 ** the SQLITE_NULLEQ flag were omitted from P5. 1922 */ 1923 /* Opcode: Le P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1924 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]<=r[P3] goto P2 1925 ** 1926 ** This works just like the Lt opcode except that the jump is taken if 1927 ** the content of register P3 is less than or equal to the content of 1928 ** register P1. See the Lt opcode for additional information. 1929 */ 1930 /* Opcode: Gt P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1931 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]>r[P3] goto P2 1932 ** 1933 ** This works just like the Lt opcode except that the jump is taken if 1934 ** the content of register P3 is greater than the content of 1935 ** register P1. See the Lt opcode for additional information. 1936 */ 1937 /* Opcode: Ge P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 1938 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]>=r[P3] goto P2 1939 ** 1940 ** This works just like the Lt opcode except that the jump is taken if 1941 ** the content of register P3 is greater than or equal to the content of 1942 ** register P1. See the Lt opcode for additional information. 1943 */ 1944 case OP_Eq: /* same as TK_EQ, jump, in1, in3 */ 1945 case OP_Ne: /* same as TK_NE, jump, in1, in3 */ 1946 case OP_Lt: /* same as TK_LT, jump, in1, in3 */ 1947 case OP_Le: /* same as TK_LE, jump, in1, in3 */ 1948 case OP_Gt: /* same as TK_GT, jump, in1, in3 */ 1949 case OP_Ge: { /* same as TK_GE, jump, in1, in3 */ 1950 int res; /* Result of the comparison of pIn1 against pIn3 */ 1951 char affinity; /* Affinity to use for comparison */ 1952 u16 flags1; /* Copy of initial value of pIn1->flags */ 1953 u16 flags3; /* Copy of initial value of pIn3->flags */ 1954 1955 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 1956 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 1957 flags1 = pIn1->flags; 1958 flags3 = pIn3->flags; 1959 if( (flags1 | flags3)&MEM_Null ){ 1960 /* One or both operands are NULL */ 1961 if( pOp->p5 & SQLITE_NULLEQ ){ 1962 /* If SQLITE_NULLEQ is set (which will only happen if the operator is 1963 ** OP_Eq or OP_Ne) then take the jump or not depending on whether 1964 ** or not both operands are null. 1965 */ 1966 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_Eq || pOp->opcode==OP_Ne ); 1967 assert( (flags1 & MEM_Cleared)==0 ); 1968 assert( (pOp->p5 & SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL)==0 ); 1969 if( (flags1&MEM_Null)!=0 1970 && (flags3&MEM_Null)!=0 1971 && (flags3&MEM_Cleared)==0 1972 ){ 1973 res = 0; /* Results are equal */ 1974 }else{ 1975 res = 1; /* Results are not equal */ 1976 } 1977 }else{ 1978 /* SQLITE_NULLEQ is clear and at least one operand is NULL, 1979 ** then the result is always NULL. 1980 ** The jump is taken if the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL bit is set. 1981 */ 1982 if( pOp->p5 & SQLITE_STOREP2 ){ 1983 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 1984 memAboutToChange(p, pOut); 1985 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Null); 1986 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, pOut); 1987 }else{ 1988 VdbeBranchTaken(2,3); 1989 if( pOp->p5 & SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL ){ 1990 goto jump_to_p2; 1991 } 1992 } 1993 break; 1994 } 1995 }else{ 1996 /* Neither operand is NULL. Do a comparison. */ 1997 affinity = pOp->p5 & SQLITE_AFF_MASK; 1998 if( affinity>=SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ){ 1999 if( (flags1 & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_Str))==MEM_Str ){ 2000 applyNumericAffinity(pIn1,0); 2001 } 2002 if( (flags3 & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_Str))==MEM_Str ){ 2003 applyNumericAffinity(pIn3,0); 2004 } 2005 }else if( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ){ 2006 if( (flags1 & MEM_Str)==0 && (flags1 & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real))!=0 ){ 2007 testcase( pIn1->flags & MEM_Int ); 2008 testcase( pIn1->flags & MEM_Real ); 2009 sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(pIn1, encoding, 1); 2010 testcase( (flags1&MEM_Dyn) != (pIn1->flags&MEM_Dyn) ); 2011 flags1 = (pIn1->flags & ~MEM_TypeMask) | (flags1 & MEM_TypeMask); 2012 } 2013 if( (flags3 & MEM_Str)==0 && (flags3 & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real))!=0 ){ 2014 testcase( pIn3->flags & MEM_Int ); 2015 testcase( pIn3->flags & MEM_Real ); 2016 sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(pIn3, encoding, 1); 2017 testcase( (flags3&MEM_Dyn) != (pIn3->flags&MEM_Dyn) ); 2018 flags3 = (pIn3->flags & ~MEM_TypeMask) | (flags3 & MEM_TypeMask); 2019 } 2020 } 2021 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_COLLSEQ || pOp->p4.pColl==0 ); 2022 if( flags1 & MEM_Zero ){ 2023 sqlite3VdbeMemExpandBlob(pIn1); 2024 flags1 &= ~MEM_Zero; 2025 } 2026 if( flags3 & MEM_Zero ){ 2027 sqlite3VdbeMemExpandBlob(pIn3); 2028 flags3 &= ~MEM_Zero; 2029 } 2030 res = sqlite3MemCompare(pIn3, pIn1, pOp->p4.pColl); 2031 } 2032 switch( pOp->opcode ){ 2033 case OP_Eq: res = res==0; break; 2034 case OP_Ne: res = res!=0; break; 2035 case OP_Lt: res = res<0; break; 2036 case OP_Le: res = res<=0; break; 2037 case OP_Gt: res = res>0; break; 2038 default: res = res>=0; break; 2039 } 2040 2041 /* Undo any changes made by applyAffinity() to the input registers. */ 2042 assert( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Dyn) == (flags1 & MEM_Dyn) ); 2043 pIn1->flags = flags1; 2044 assert( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Dyn) == (flags3 & MEM_Dyn) ); 2045 pIn3->flags = flags3; 2046 2047 if( pOp->p5 & SQLITE_STOREP2 ){ 2048 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 2049 memAboutToChange(p, pOut); 2050 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int); 2051 pOut->u.i = res; 2052 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, pOut); 2053 }else{ 2054 VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0, (pOp->p5 & SQLITE_NULLEQ)?2:3); 2055 if( res ){ 2056 goto jump_to_p2; 2057 } 2058 } 2059 break; 2060 } 2061 2062 /* Opcode: Permutation * * * P4 * 2063 ** 2064 ** Set the permutation used by the OP_Compare operator to be the array 2065 ** of integers in P4. 2066 ** 2067 ** The permutation is only valid until the next OP_Compare that has 2068 ** the OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit set in P5. Typically the OP_Permutation should 2069 ** occur immediately prior to the OP_Compare. 2070 */ 2071 case OP_Permutation: { 2072 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INTARRAY ); 2073 assert( pOp->p4.ai ); 2074 aPermute = pOp->p4.ai; 2075 break; 2076 } 2077 2078 /* Opcode: Compare P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 2079 ** Synopsis: r[P1@P3] <-> r[P2@P3] 2080 ** 2081 ** Compare two vectors of registers in reg(P1)..reg(P1+P3-1) (call this 2082 ** vector "A") and in reg(P2)..reg(P2+P3-1) ("B"). Save the result of 2083 ** the comparison for use by the next OP_Jump instruct. 2084 ** 2085 ** If P5 has the OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit set, then the order of comparison is 2086 ** determined by the most recent OP_Permutation operator. If the 2087 ** OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit is clear, then register are compared in sequential 2088 ** order. 2089 ** 2090 ** P4 is a KeyInfo structure that defines collating sequences and sort 2091 ** orders for the comparison. The permutation applies to registers 2092 ** only. The KeyInfo elements are used sequentially. 2093 ** 2094 ** The comparison is a sort comparison, so NULLs compare equal, 2095 ** NULLs are less than numbers, numbers are less than strings, 2096 ** and strings are less than blobs. 2097 */ 2098 case OP_Compare: { 2099 int n; 2100 int i; 2101 int p1; 2102 int p2; 2103 const KeyInfo *pKeyInfo; 2104 int idx; 2105 CollSeq *pColl; /* Collating sequence to use on this term */ 2106 int bRev; /* True for DESCENDING sort order */ 2107 2108 if( (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_PERMUTE)==0 ) aPermute = 0; 2109 n = pOp->p3; 2110 pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo; 2111 assert( n>0 ); 2112 assert( pKeyInfo!=0 ); 2113 p1 = pOp->p1; 2114 p2 = pOp->p2; 2115 #if SQLITE_DEBUG 2116 if( aPermute ){ 2117 int k, mx = 0; 2118 for(k=0; k<n; k++) if( aPermute[k]>mx ) mx = aPermute[k]; 2119 assert( p1>0 && p1+mx<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor)+1 ); 2120 assert( p2>0 && p2+mx<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor)+1 ); 2121 }else{ 2122 assert( p1>0 && p1+n<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor)+1 ); 2123 assert( p2>0 && p2+n<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor)+1 ); 2124 } 2125 #endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */ 2126 for(i=0; i<n; i++){ 2127 idx = aPermute ? aPermute[i] : i; 2128 assert( memIsValid(&aMem[p1+idx]) ); 2129 assert( memIsValid(&aMem[p2+idx]) ); 2130 REGISTER_TRACE(p1+idx, &aMem[p1+idx]); 2131 REGISTER_TRACE(p2+idx, &aMem[p2+idx]); 2132 assert( i<pKeyInfo->nField ); 2133 pColl = pKeyInfo->aColl[i]; 2134 bRev = pKeyInfo->aSortOrder[i]; 2135 iCompare = sqlite3MemCompare(&aMem[p1+idx], &aMem[p2+idx], pColl); 2136 if( iCompare ){ 2137 if( bRev ) iCompare = -iCompare; 2138 break; 2139 } 2140 } 2141 aPermute = 0; 2142 break; 2143 } 2144 2145 /* Opcode: Jump P1 P2 P3 * * 2146 ** 2147 ** Jump to the instruction at address P1, P2, or P3 depending on whether 2148 ** in the most recent OP_Compare instruction the P1 vector was less than 2149 ** equal to, or greater than the P2 vector, respectively. 2150 */ 2151 case OP_Jump: { /* jump */ 2152 if( iCompare<0 ){ 2153 VdbeBranchTaken(0,3); pOp = &aOp[pOp->p1 - 1]; 2154 }else if( iCompare==0 ){ 2155 VdbeBranchTaken(1,3); pOp = &aOp[pOp->p2 - 1]; 2156 }else{ 2157 VdbeBranchTaken(2,3); pOp = &aOp[pOp->p3 - 1]; 2158 } 2159 break; 2160 } 2161 2162 /* Opcode: And P1 P2 P3 * * 2163 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=(r[P1] && r[P2]) 2164 ** 2165 ** Take the logical AND of the values in registers P1 and P2 and 2166 ** write the result into register P3. 2167 ** 2168 ** If either P1 or P2 is 0 (false) then the result is 0 even if 2169 ** the other input is NULL. A NULL and true or two NULLs give 2170 ** a NULL output. 2171 */ 2172 /* Opcode: Or P1 P2 P3 * * 2173 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=(r[P1] || r[P2]) 2174 ** 2175 ** Take the logical OR of the values in register P1 and P2 and 2176 ** store the answer in register P3. 2177 ** 2178 ** If either P1 or P2 is nonzero (true) then the result is 1 (true) 2179 ** even if the other input is NULL. A NULL and false or two NULLs 2180 ** give a NULL output. 2181 */ 2182 case OP_And: /* same as TK_AND, in1, in2, out3 */ 2183 case OP_Or: { /* same as TK_OR, in1, in2, out3 */ 2184 int v1; /* Left operand: 0==FALSE, 1==TRUE, 2==UNKNOWN or NULL */ 2185 int v2; /* Right operand: 0==FALSE, 1==TRUE, 2==UNKNOWN or NULL */ 2186 2187 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 2188 if( pIn1->flags & MEM_Null ){ 2189 v1 = 2; 2190 }else{ 2191 v1 = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1)!=0; 2192 } 2193 pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 2194 if( pIn2->flags & MEM_Null ){ 2195 v2 = 2; 2196 }else{ 2197 v2 = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn2)!=0; 2198 } 2199 if( pOp->opcode==OP_And ){ 2200 static const unsigned char and_logic[] = { 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 0, 2, 2 }; 2201 v1 = and_logic[v1*3+v2]; 2202 }else{ 2203 static const unsigned char or_logic[] = { 0, 1, 2, 1, 1, 1, 2, 1, 2 }; 2204 v1 = or_logic[v1*3+v2]; 2205 } 2206 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 2207 if( v1==2 ){ 2208 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Null); 2209 }else{ 2210 pOut->u.i = v1; 2211 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Int); 2212 } 2213 break; 2214 } 2215 2216 /* Opcode: Not P1 P2 * * * 2217 ** Synopsis: r[P2]= !r[P1] 2218 ** 2219 ** Interpret the value in register P1 as a boolean value. Store the 2220 ** boolean complement in register P2. If the value in register P1 is 2221 ** NULL, then a NULL is stored in P2. 2222 */ 2223 case OP_Not: { /* same as TK_NOT, in1, out2 */ 2224 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 2225 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 2226 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); 2227 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){ 2228 pOut->flags = MEM_Int; 2229 pOut->u.i = !sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1); 2230 } 2231 break; 2232 } 2233 2234 /* Opcode: BitNot P1 P2 * * * 2235 ** Synopsis: r[P1]= ~r[P1] 2236 ** 2237 ** Interpret the content of register P1 as an integer. Store the 2238 ** ones-complement of the P1 value into register P2. If P1 holds 2239 ** a NULL then store a NULL in P2. 2240 */ 2241 case OP_BitNot: { /* same as TK_BITNOT, in1, out2 */ 2242 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 2243 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 2244 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pOut); 2245 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){ 2246 pOut->flags = MEM_Int; 2247 pOut->u.i = ~sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1); 2248 } 2249 break; 2250 } 2251 2252 /* Opcode: Once P1 P2 * * * 2253 ** 2254 ** Check the "once" flag number P1. If it is set, jump to instruction P2. 2255 ** Otherwise, set the flag and fall through to the next instruction. 2256 ** In other words, this opcode causes all following opcodes up through P2 2257 ** (but not including P2) to run just once and to be skipped on subsequent 2258 ** times through the loop. 2259 ** 2260 ** All "once" flags are initially cleared whenever a prepared statement 2261 ** first begins to run. 2262 */ 2263 case OP_Once: { /* jump */ 2264 assert( pOp->p1<p->nOnceFlag ); 2265 VdbeBranchTaken(p->aOnceFlag[pOp->p1]!=0, 2); 2266 if( p->aOnceFlag[pOp->p1] ){ 2267 goto jump_to_p2; 2268 }else{ 2269 p->aOnceFlag[pOp->p1] = 1; 2270 } 2271 break; 2272 } 2273 2274 /* Opcode: If P1 P2 P3 * * 2275 ** 2276 ** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is true. The value 2277 ** is considered true if it is numeric and non-zero. If the value 2278 ** in P1 is NULL then take the jump if and only if P3 is non-zero. 2279 */ 2280 /* Opcode: IfNot P1 P2 P3 * * 2281 ** 2282 ** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is False. The value 2283 ** is considered false if it has a numeric value of zero. If the value 2284 ** in P1 is NULL then take the jump if and only if P3 is non-zero. 2285 */ 2286 case OP_If: /* jump, in1 */ 2287 case OP_IfNot: { /* jump, in1 */ 2288 int c; 2289 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 2290 if( pIn1->flags & MEM_Null ){ 2291 c = pOp->p3; 2292 }else{ 2293 #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT 2294 c = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn1)!=0; 2295 #else 2296 c = sqlite3VdbeRealValue(pIn1)!=0.0; 2297 #endif 2298 if( pOp->opcode==OP_IfNot ) c = !c; 2299 } 2300 VdbeBranchTaken(c!=0, 2); 2301 if( c ){ 2302 goto jump_to_p2; 2303 } 2304 break; 2305 } 2306 2307 /* Opcode: IsNull P1 P2 * * * 2308 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]==NULL goto P2 2309 ** 2310 ** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is NULL. 2311 */ 2312 case OP_IsNull: { /* same as TK_ISNULL, jump, in1 */ 2313 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 2314 VdbeBranchTaken( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)!=0, 2); 2315 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)!=0 ){ 2316 goto jump_to_p2; 2317 } 2318 break; 2319 } 2320 2321 /* Opcode: NotNull P1 P2 * * * 2322 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=NULL goto P2 2323 ** 2324 ** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL. 2325 */ 2326 case OP_NotNull: { /* same as TK_NOTNULL, jump, in1 */ 2327 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 2328 VdbeBranchTaken( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0, 2); 2329 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){ 2330 goto jump_to_p2; 2331 } 2332 break; 2333 } 2334 2335 /* Opcode: Column P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 2336 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=PX 2337 ** 2338 ** Interpret the data that cursor P1 points to as a structure built using 2339 ** the MakeRecord instruction. (See the MakeRecord opcode for additional 2340 ** information about the format of the data.) Extract the P2-th column 2341 ** from this record. If there are less that (P2+1) 2342 ** values in the record, extract a NULL. 2343 ** 2344 ** The value extracted is stored in register P3. 2345 ** 2346 ** If the column contains fewer than P2 fields, then extract a NULL. Or, 2347 ** if the P4 argument is a P4_MEM use the value of the P4 argument as 2348 ** the result. 2349 ** 2350 ** If the OPFLAG_CLEARCACHE bit is set on P5 and P1 is a pseudo-table cursor, 2351 ** then the cache of the cursor is reset prior to extracting the column. 2352 ** The first OP_Column against a pseudo-table after the value of the content 2353 ** register has changed should have this bit set. 2354 ** 2355 ** If the OPFLAG_LENGTHARG and OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG bits are set on P5 when 2356 ** the result is guaranteed to only be used as the argument of a length() 2357 ** or typeof() function, respectively. The loading of large blobs can be 2358 ** skipped for length() and all content loading can be skipped for typeof(). 2359 */ 2360 case OP_Column: { 2361 i64 payloadSize64; /* Number of bytes in the record */ 2362 int p2; /* column number to retrieve */ 2363 VdbeCursor *pC; /* The VDBE cursor */ 2364 BtCursor *pCrsr; /* The BTree cursor */ 2365 u32 *aOffset; /* aOffset[i] is offset to start of data for i-th column */ 2366 int len; /* The length of the serialized data for the column */ 2367 int i; /* Loop counter */ 2368 Mem *pDest; /* Where to write the extracted value */ 2369 Mem sMem; /* For storing the record being decoded */ 2370 const u8 *zData; /* Part of the record being decoded */ 2371 const u8 *zHdr; /* Next unparsed byte of the header */ 2372 const u8 *zEndHdr; /* Pointer to first byte after the header */ 2373 u32 offset; /* Offset into the data */ 2374 u64 offset64; /* 64-bit offset */ 2375 u32 avail; /* Number of bytes of available data */ 2376 u32 t; /* A type code from the record header */ 2377 u16 fx; /* pDest->flags value */ 2378 Mem *pReg; /* PseudoTable input register */ 2379 2380 p2 = pOp->p2; 2381 assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 2382 pDest = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 2383 memAboutToChange(p, pDest); 2384 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 2385 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 2386 assert( pC!=0 ); 2387 assert( p2<pC->nField ); 2388 aOffset = pC->aOffset; 2389 assert( pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_VTAB ); 2390 assert( pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_PSEUDO || pC->nullRow ); 2391 assert( pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_SORTER ); 2392 pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; 2393 2394 /* If the cursor cache is stale, bring it up-to-date */ 2395 rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto(pC); 2396 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 2397 if( pC->cacheStatus!=p->cacheCtr ){ 2398 if( pC->nullRow ){ 2399 if( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_PSEUDO ){ 2400 assert( pC->uc.pseudoTableReg>0 ); 2401 pReg = &aMem[pC->uc.pseudoTableReg]; 2402 assert( pReg->flags & MEM_Blob ); 2403 assert( memIsValid(pReg) ); 2404 pC->payloadSize = pC->szRow = avail = pReg->n; 2405 pC->aRow = (u8*)pReg->z; 2406 }else{ 2407 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest); 2408 goto op_column_out; 2409 } 2410 }else{ 2411 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 2412 assert( pCrsr ); 2413 if( pC->isTable==0 ){ 2414 assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCrsr) ); 2415 VVA_ONLY(rc =) sqlite3BtreeKeySize(pCrsr, &payloadSize64); 2416 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); /* True because of CursorMoveto() call above */ 2417 /* sqlite3BtreeParseCellPtr() uses getVarint32() to extract the 2418 ** payload size, so it is impossible for payloadSize64 to be 2419 ** larger than 32 bits. */ 2420 assert( (payloadSize64 & SQLITE_MAX_U32)==(u64)payloadSize64 ); 2421 pC->aRow = sqlite3BtreeKeyFetch(pCrsr, &avail); 2422 pC->payloadSize = (u32)payloadSize64; 2423 }else{ 2424 assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCrsr) ); 2425 VVA_ONLY(rc =) sqlite3BtreeDataSize(pCrsr, &pC->payloadSize); 2426 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); /* DataSize() cannot fail */ 2427 pC->aRow = sqlite3BtreeDataFetch(pCrsr, &avail); 2428 } 2429 assert( avail<=65536 ); /* Maximum page size is 64KiB */ 2430 if( pC->payloadSize <= (u32)avail ){ 2431 pC->szRow = pC->payloadSize; 2432 }else if( pC->payloadSize > (u32)db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){ 2433 goto too_big; 2434 }else{ 2435 pC->szRow = avail; 2436 } 2437 } 2438 pC->cacheStatus = p->cacheCtr; 2439 pC->iHdrOffset = getVarint32(pC->aRow, offset); 2440 pC->nHdrParsed = 0; 2441 aOffset[0] = offset; 2442 2443 2444 if( avail<offset ){ 2445 /* pC->aRow does not have to hold the entire row, but it does at least 2446 ** need to cover the header of the record. If pC->aRow does not contain 2447 ** the complete header, then set it to zero, forcing the header to be 2448 ** dynamically allocated. */ 2449 pC->aRow = 0; 2450 pC->szRow = 0; 2451 2452 /* Make sure a corrupt database has not given us an oversize header. 2453 ** Do this now to avoid an oversize memory allocation. 2454 ** 2455 ** Type entries can be between 1 and 5 bytes each. But 4 and 5 byte 2456 ** types use so much data space that there can only be 4096 and 32 of 2457 ** them, respectively. So the maximum header length results from a 2458 ** 3-byte type for each of the maximum of 32768 columns plus three 2459 ** extra bytes for the header length itself. 32768*3 + 3 = 98307. 2460 */ 2461 if( offset > 98307 || offset > pC->payloadSize ){ 2462 rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; 2463 goto op_column_error; 2464 } 2465 } 2466 2467 /* The following goto is an optimization. It can be omitted and 2468 ** everything will still work. But OP_Column is measurably faster 2469 ** by skipping the subsequent conditional, which is always true. 2470 */ 2471 assert( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ); /* Conditional skipped */ 2472 goto op_column_read_header; 2473 } 2474 2475 /* Make sure at least the first p2+1 entries of the header have been 2476 ** parsed and valid information is in aOffset[] and pC->aType[]. 2477 */ 2478 if( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ){ 2479 /* If there is more header available for parsing in the record, try 2480 ** to extract additional fields up through the p2+1-th field 2481 */ 2482 op_column_read_header: 2483 if( pC->iHdrOffset<aOffset[0] ){ 2484 /* Make sure zData points to enough of the record to cover the header. */ 2485 if( pC->aRow==0 ){ 2486 memset(&sMem, 0, sizeof(sMem)); 2487 rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree(pCrsr, 0, aOffset[0], !pC->isTable, &sMem); 2488 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto op_column_error; 2489 zData = (u8*)sMem.z; 2490 }else{ 2491 zData = pC->aRow; 2492 } 2493 2494 /* Fill in pC->aType[i] and aOffset[i] values through the p2-th field. */ 2495 i = pC->nHdrParsed; 2496 offset64 = aOffset[i]; 2497 zHdr = zData + pC->iHdrOffset; 2498 zEndHdr = zData + aOffset[0]; 2499 assert( i<=p2 && zHdr<zEndHdr ); 2500 do{ 2501 if( (t = zHdr[0])<0x80 ){ 2502 zHdr++; 2503 offset64 += sqlite3VdbeOneByteSerialTypeLen(t); 2504 }else{ 2505 zHdr += sqlite3GetVarint32(zHdr, &t); 2506 offset64 += sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(t); 2507 } 2508 pC->aType[i++] = t; 2509 aOffset[i] = (u32)(offset64 & 0xffffffff); 2510 }while( i<=p2 && zHdr<zEndHdr ); 2511 pC->nHdrParsed = i; 2512 pC->iHdrOffset = (u32)(zHdr - zData); 2513 if( pC->aRow==0 ) sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&sMem); 2514 2515 /* The record is corrupt if any of the following are true: 2516 ** (1) the bytes of the header extend past the declared header size 2517 ** (2) the entire header was used but not all data was used 2518 ** (3) the end of the data extends beyond the end of the record. 2519 */ 2520 if( (zHdr>=zEndHdr && (zHdr>zEndHdr || offset64!=pC->payloadSize)) 2521 || (offset64 > pC->payloadSize) 2522 ){ 2523 rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; 2524 goto op_column_error; 2525 } 2526 }else{ 2527 t = 0; 2528 } 2529 2530 /* If after trying to extract new entries from the header, nHdrParsed is 2531 ** still not up to p2, that means that the record has fewer than p2 2532 ** columns. So the result will be either the default value or a NULL. 2533 */ 2534 if( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ){ 2535 if( pOp->p4type==P4_MEM ){ 2536 sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pDest, pOp->p4.pMem, MEM_Static); 2537 }else{ 2538 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest); 2539 } 2540 goto op_column_out; 2541 } 2542 }else{ 2543 t = pC->aType[p2]; 2544 } 2545 2546 /* Extract the content for the p2+1-th column. Control can only 2547 ** reach this point if aOffset[p2], aOffset[p2+1], and pC->aType[p2] are 2548 ** all valid. 2549 */ 2550 assert( p2<pC->nHdrParsed ); 2551 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); 2552 assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(pDest) ); 2553 if( VdbeMemDynamic(pDest) ) sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest); 2554 assert( t==pC->aType[p2] ); 2555 if( pC->szRow>=aOffset[p2+1] ){ 2556 /* This is the common case where the desired content fits on the original 2557 ** page - where the content is not on an overflow page */ 2558 sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(pC->aRow+aOffset[p2], t, pDest); 2559 }else{ 2560 /* This branch happens only when content is on overflow pages */ 2561 if( ((pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_LENGTHARG|OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG))!=0 2562 && ((t>=12 && (t&1)==0) || (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG)!=0)) 2563 || (len = sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(t))==0 2564 ){ 2565 /* Content is irrelevant for 2566 ** 1. the typeof() function, 2567 ** 2. the length(X) function if X is a blob, and 2568 ** 3. if the content length is zero. 2569 ** So we might as well use bogus content rather than reading 2570 ** content from disk. NULL will work for the value for strings 2571 ** and blobs and whatever is in the payloadSize64 variable 2572 ** will work for everything else. */ 2573 sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(t<=13 ? (u8*)&payloadSize64 : 0, t, pDest); 2574 }else{ 2575 rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree(pCrsr, aOffset[p2], len, !pC->isTable, 2576 pDest); 2577 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 2578 goto op_column_error; 2579 } 2580 sqlite3VdbeSerialGet((const u8*)pDest->z, t, pDest); 2581 pDest->flags &= ~MEM_Ephem; 2582 } 2583 } 2584 pDest->enc = encoding; 2585 2586 op_column_out: 2587 /* If the column value is an ephemeral string, go ahead and persist 2588 ** that string in case the cursor moves before the column value is 2589 ** used. The following code does the equivalent of Deephemeralize() 2590 ** but does it faster. */ 2591 if( (pDest->flags & MEM_Ephem)!=0 && pDest->z ){ 2592 fx = pDest->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob); 2593 assert( fx!=0 ); 2594 zData = (const u8*)pDest->z; 2595 len = pDest->n; 2596 if( sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize(pDest, len+2) ) goto no_mem; 2597 memcpy(pDest->z, zData, len); 2598 pDest->z[len] = 0; 2599 pDest->z[len+1] = 0; 2600 pDest->flags = fx|MEM_Term; 2601 } 2602 op_column_error: 2603 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pDest); 2604 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pDest); 2605 break; 2606 } 2607 2608 /* Opcode: Affinity P1 P2 * P4 * 2609 ** Synopsis: affinity(r[P1@P2]) 2610 ** 2611 ** Apply affinities to a range of P2 registers starting with P1. 2612 ** 2613 ** P4 is a string that is P2 characters long. The nth character of the 2614 ** string indicates the column affinity that should be used for the nth 2615 ** memory cell in the range. 2616 */ 2617 case OP_Affinity: { 2618 const char *zAffinity; /* The affinity to be applied */ 2619 char cAff; /* A single character of affinity */ 2620 2621 zAffinity = pOp->p4.z; 2622 assert( zAffinity!=0 ); 2623 assert( zAffinity[pOp->p2]==0 ); 2624 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 2625 while( (cAff = *(zAffinity++))!=0 ){ 2626 assert( pIn1 <= &p->aMem[(p->nMem-p->nCursor)] ); 2627 assert( memIsValid(pIn1) ); 2628 applyAffinity(pIn1, cAff, encoding); 2629 pIn1++; 2630 } 2631 break; 2632 } 2633 2634 /* Opcode: MakeRecord P1 P2 P3 P4 * 2635 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=mkrec(r[P1@P2]) 2636 ** 2637 ** Convert P2 registers beginning with P1 into the [record format] 2638 ** use as a data record in a database table or as a key 2639 ** in an index. The OP_Column opcode can decode the record later. 2640 ** 2641 ** P4 may be a string that is P2 characters long. The nth character of the 2642 ** string indicates the column affinity that should be used for the nth 2643 ** field of the index key. 2644 ** 2645 ** The mapping from character to affinity is given by the SQLITE_AFF_ 2646 ** macros defined in sqliteInt.h. 2647 ** 2648 ** If P4 is NULL then all index fields have the affinity BLOB. 2649 */ 2650 case OP_MakeRecord: { 2651 u8 *zNewRecord; /* A buffer to hold the data for the new record */ 2652 Mem *pRec; /* The new record */ 2653 u64 nData; /* Number of bytes of data space */ 2654 int nHdr; /* Number of bytes of header space */ 2655 i64 nByte; /* Data space required for this record */ 2656 i64 nZero; /* Number of zero bytes at the end of the record */ 2657 int nVarint; /* Number of bytes in a varint */ 2658 u32 serial_type; /* Type field */ 2659 Mem *pData0; /* First field to be combined into the record */ 2660 Mem *pLast; /* Last field of the record */ 2661 int nField; /* Number of fields in the record */ 2662 char *zAffinity; /* The affinity string for the record */ 2663 int file_format; /* File format to use for encoding */ 2664 int i; /* Space used in zNewRecord[] header */ 2665 int j; /* Space used in zNewRecord[] content */ 2666 u32 len; /* Length of a field */ 2667 2668 /* Assuming the record contains N fields, the record format looks 2669 ** like this: 2670 ** 2671 ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2672 ** | hdr-size | type 0 | type 1 | ... | type N-1 | data0 | ... | data N-1 | 2673 ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2674 ** 2675 ** Data(0) is taken from register P1. Data(1) comes from register P1+1 2676 ** and so forth. 2677 ** 2678 ** Each type field is a varint representing the serial type of the 2679 ** corresponding data element (see sqlite3VdbeSerialType()). The 2680 ** hdr-size field is also a varint which is the offset from the beginning 2681 ** of the record to data0. 2682 */ 2683 nData = 0; /* Number of bytes of data space */ 2684 nHdr = 0; /* Number of bytes of header space */ 2685 nZero = 0; /* Number of zero bytes at the end of the record */ 2686 nField = pOp->p1; 2687 zAffinity = pOp->p4.z; 2688 assert( nField>0 && pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2+nField<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor)+1 ); 2689 pData0 = &aMem[nField]; 2690 nField = pOp->p2; 2691 pLast = &pData0[nField-1]; 2692 file_format = p->minWriteFileFormat; 2693 2694 /* Identify the output register */ 2695 assert( pOp->p3<pOp->p1 || pOp->p3>=pOp->p1+pOp->p2 ); 2696 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 2697 memAboutToChange(p, pOut); 2698 2699 /* Apply the requested affinity to all inputs 2700 */ 2701 assert( pData0<=pLast ); 2702 if( zAffinity ){ 2703 pRec = pData0; 2704 do{ 2705 applyAffinity(pRec++, *(zAffinity++), encoding); 2706 assert( zAffinity[0]==0 || pRec<=pLast ); 2707 }while( zAffinity[0] ); 2708 } 2709 2710 /* Loop through the elements that will make up the record to figure 2711 ** out how much space is required for the new record. 2712 */ 2713 pRec = pLast; 2714 do{ 2715 assert( memIsValid(pRec) ); 2716 pRec->uTemp = serial_type = sqlite3VdbeSerialType(pRec, file_format, &len); 2717 if( pRec->flags & MEM_Zero ){ 2718 if( nData ){ 2719 if( sqlite3VdbeMemExpandBlob(pRec) ) goto no_mem; 2720 }else{ 2721 nZero += pRec->u.nZero; 2722 len -= pRec->u.nZero; 2723 } 2724 } 2725 nData += len; 2726 testcase( serial_type==127 ); 2727 testcase( serial_type==128 ); 2728 nHdr += serial_type<=127 ? 1 : sqlite3VarintLen(serial_type); 2729 }while( (--pRec)>=pData0 ); 2730 2731 /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-22564-11647 The header begins with a single varint 2732 ** which determines the total number of bytes in the header. The varint 2733 ** value is the size of the header in bytes including the size varint 2734 ** itself. */ 2735 testcase( nHdr==126 ); 2736 testcase( nHdr==127 ); 2737 if( nHdr<=126 ){ 2738 /* The common case */ 2739 nHdr += 1; 2740 }else{ 2741 /* Rare case of a really large header */ 2742 nVarint = sqlite3VarintLen(nHdr); 2743 nHdr += nVarint; 2744 if( nVarint<sqlite3VarintLen(nHdr) ) nHdr++; 2745 } 2746 nByte = nHdr+nData; 2747 if( nByte+nZero>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){ 2748 goto too_big; 2749 } 2750 2751 /* Make sure the output register has a buffer large enough to store 2752 ** the new record. The output register (pOp->p3) is not allowed to 2753 ** be one of the input registers (because the following call to 2754 ** sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize() could clobber the value before it is used). 2755 */ 2756 if( sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize(pOut, (int)nByte) ){ 2757 goto no_mem; 2758 } 2759 zNewRecord = (u8 *)pOut->z; 2760 2761 /* Write the record */ 2762 i = putVarint32(zNewRecord, nHdr); 2763 j = nHdr; 2764 assert( pData0<=pLast ); 2765 pRec = pData0; 2766 do{ 2767 serial_type = pRec->uTemp; 2768 /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-06529-47362 Following the size varint are one or more 2769 ** additional varints, one per column. */ 2770 i += putVarint32(&zNewRecord[i], serial_type); /* serial type */ 2771 /* EVIDENCE-OF: R-64536-51728 The values for each column in the record 2772 ** immediately follow the header. */ 2773 j += sqlite3VdbeSerialPut(&zNewRecord[j], pRec, serial_type); /* content */ 2774 }while( (++pRec)<=pLast ); 2775 assert( i==nHdr ); 2776 assert( j==nByte ); 2777 2778 assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 2779 pOut->n = (int)nByte; 2780 pOut->flags = MEM_Blob; 2781 if( nZero ){ 2782 pOut->u.nZero = nZero; 2783 pOut->flags |= MEM_Zero; 2784 } 2785 pOut->enc = SQLITE_UTF8; /* In case the blob is ever converted to text */ 2786 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pOut); 2787 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); 2788 break; 2789 } 2790 2791 /* Opcode: Count P1 P2 * * * 2792 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=count() 2793 ** 2794 ** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index 2795 ** opened by cursor P1 in register P2 2796 */ 2797 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_BTREECOUNT 2798 case OP_Count: { /* out2 */ 2799 i64 nEntry; 2800 BtCursor *pCrsr; 2801 2802 assert( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 2803 pCrsr = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->uc.pCursor; 2804 assert( pCrsr ); 2805 nEntry = 0; /* Not needed. Only used to silence a warning. */ 2806 rc = sqlite3BtreeCount(pCrsr, &nEntry); 2807 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 2808 pOut->u.i = nEntry; 2809 break; 2810 } 2811 #endif 2812 2813 /* Opcode: Savepoint P1 * * P4 * 2814 ** 2815 ** Open, release or rollback the savepoint named by parameter P4, depending 2816 ** on the value of P1. To open a new savepoint, P1==0. To release (commit) an 2817 ** existing savepoint, P1==1, or to rollback an existing savepoint P1==2. 2818 */ 2819 case OP_Savepoint: { 2820 int p1; /* Value of P1 operand */ 2821 char *zName; /* Name of savepoint */ 2822 int nName; 2823 Savepoint *pNew; 2824 Savepoint *pSavepoint; 2825 Savepoint *pTmp; 2826 int iSavepoint; 2827 int ii; 2828 2829 p1 = pOp->p1; 2830 zName = pOp->p4.z; 2831 2832 /* Assert that the p1 parameter is valid. Also that if there is no open 2833 ** transaction, then there cannot be any savepoints. 2834 */ 2835 assert( db->pSavepoint==0 || db->autoCommit==0 ); 2836 assert( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN||p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE||p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ); 2837 assert( db->pSavepoint || db->isTransactionSavepoint==0 ); 2838 assert( checkSavepointCount(db) ); 2839 assert( p->bIsReader ); 2840 2841 if( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN ){ 2842 if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){ 2843 /* A new savepoint cannot be created if there are active write 2844 ** statements (i.e. open read/write incremental blob handles). 2845 */ 2846 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot open savepoint - SQL statements in progress"); 2847 rc = SQLITE_BUSY; 2848 }else{ 2849 nName = sqlite3Strlen30(zName); 2850 2851 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 2852 /* This call is Ok even if this savepoint is actually a transaction 2853 ** savepoint (and therefore should not prompt xSavepoint()) callbacks. 2854 ** If this is a transaction savepoint being opened, it is guaranteed 2855 ** that the db->aVTrans[] array is empty. */ 2856 assert( db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVTrans==0 ); 2857 rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, SAVEPOINT_BEGIN, 2858 db->nStatement+db->nSavepoint); 2859 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; 2860 #endif 2861 2862 /* Create a new savepoint structure. */ 2863 pNew = sqlite3DbMallocRaw(db, sizeof(Savepoint)+nName+1); 2864 if( pNew ){ 2865 pNew->zName = (char *)&pNew[1]; 2866 memcpy(pNew->zName, zName, nName+1); 2867 2868 /* If there is no open transaction, then mark this as a special 2869 ** "transaction savepoint". */ 2870 if( db->autoCommit ){ 2871 db->autoCommit = 0; 2872 db->isTransactionSavepoint = 1; 2873 }else{ 2874 db->nSavepoint++; 2875 } 2876 2877 /* Link the new savepoint into the database handle's list. */ 2878 pNew->pNext = db->pSavepoint; 2879 db->pSavepoint = pNew; 2880 pNew->nDeferredCons = db->nDeferredCons; 2881 pNew->nDeferredImmCons = db->nDeferredImmCons; 2882 } 2883 } 2884 }else{ 2885 iSavepoint = 0; 2886 2887 /* Find the named savepoint. If there is no such savepoint, then an 2888 ** an error is returned to the user. */ 2889 for( 2890 pSavepoint = db->pSavepoint; 2891 pSavepoint && sqlite3StrICmp(pSavepoint->zName, zName); 2892 pSavepoint = pSavepoint->pNext 2893 ){ 2894 iSavepoint++; 2895 } 2896 if( !pSavepoint ){ 2897 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "no such savepoint: %s", zName); 2898 rc = SQLITE_ERROR; 2899 }else if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){ 2900 /* It is not possible to release (commit) a savepoint if there are 2901 ** active write statements. 2902 */ 2903 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot release savepoint - " 2904 "SQL statements in progress"); 2905 rc = SQLITE_BUSY; 2906 }else{ 2907 2908 /* Determine whether or not this is a transaction savepoint. If so, 2909 ** and this is a RELEASE command, then the current transaction 2910 ** is committed. 2911 */ 2912 int isTransaction = pSavepoint->pNext==0 && db->isTransactionSavepoint; 2913 if( isTransaction && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){ 2914 if( (rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1))!=SQLITE_OK ){ 2915 goto vdbe_return; 2916 } 2917 db->autoCommit = 1; 2918 if( sqlite3VdbeHalt(p)==SQLITE_BUSY ){ 2919 p->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp); 2920 db->autoCommit = 0; 2921 p->rc = rc = SQLITE_BUSY; 2922 goto vdbe_return; 2923 } 2924 db->isTransactionSavepoint = 0; 2925 rc = p->rc; 2926 }else{ 2927 int isSchemaChange; 2928 iSavepoint = db->nSavepoint - iSavepoint - 1; 2929 if( p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){ 2930 isSchemaChange = (db->flags & SQLITE_InternChanges)!=0; 2931 for(ii=0; ii<db->nDb; ii++){ 2932 rc = sqlite3BtreeTripAllCursors(db->aDb[ii].pBt, 2933 SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK, 2934 isSchemaChange==0); 2935 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; 2936 } 2937 }else{ 2938 isSchemaChange = 0; 2939 } 2940 for(ii=0; ii<db->nDb; ii++){ 2941 rc = sqlite3BtreeSavepoint(db->aDb[ii].pBt, p1, iSavepoint); 2942 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 2943 goto abort_due_to_error; 2944 } 2945 } 2946 if( isSchemaChange ){ 2947 sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db); 2948 sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db); 2949 db->flags = (db->flags | SQLITE_InternChanges); 2950 } 2951 } 2952 2953 /* Regardless of whether this is a RELEASE or ROLLBACK, destroy all 2954 ** savepoints nested inside of the savepoint being operated on. */ 2955 while( db->pSavepoint!=pSavepoint ){ 2956 pTmp = db->pSavepoint; 2957 db->pSavepoint = pTmp->pNext; 2958 sqlite3DbFree(db, pTmp); 2959 db->nSavepoint--; 2960 } 2961 2962 /* If it is a RELEASE, then destroy the savepoint being operated on 2963 ** too. If it is a ROLLBACK TO, then set the number of deferred 2964 ** constraint violations present in the database to the value stored 2965 ** when the savepoint was created. */ 2966 if( p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){ 2967 assert( pSavepoint==db->pSavepoint ); 2968 db->pSavepoint = pSavepoint->pNext; 2969 sqlite3DbFree(db, pSavepoint); 2970 if( !isTransaction ){ 2971 db->nSavepoint--; 2972 } 2973 }else{ 2974 db->nDeferredCons = pSavepoint->nDeferredCons; 2975 db->nDeferredImmCons = pSavepoint->nDeferredImmCons; 2976 } 2977 2978 if( !isTransaction || p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){ 2979 rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, p1, iSavepoint); 2980 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; 2981 } 2982 } 2983 } 2984 2985 break; 2986 } 2987 2988 /* Opcode: AutoCommit P1 P2 * * * 2989 ** 2990 ** Set the database auto-commit flag to P1 (1 or 0). If P2 is true, roll 2991 ** back any currently active btree transactions. If there are any active 2992 ** VMs (apart from this one), then a ROLLBACK fails. A COMMIT fails if 2993 ** there are active writing VMs or active VMs that use shared cache. 2994 ** 2995 ** This instruction causes the VM to halt. 2996 */ 2997 case OP_AutoCommit: { 2998 int desiredAutoCommit; 2999 int iRollback; 3000 int turnOnAC; 3001 3002 desiredAutoCommit = pOp->p1; 3003 iRollback = pOp->p2; 3004 turnOnAC = desiredAutoCommit && !db->autoCommit; 3005 assert( desiredAutoCommit==1 || desiredAutoCommit==0 ); 3006 assert( desiredAutoCommit==1 || iRollback==0 ); 3007 assert( db->nVdbeActive>0 ); /* At least this one VM is active */ 3008 assert( p->bIsReader ); 3009 3010 if( turnOnAC && !iRollback && db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){ 3011 /* If this instruction implements a COMMIT and other VMs are writing 3012 ** return an error indicating that the other VMs must complete first. 3013 */ 3014 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot commit transaction - " 3015 "SQL statements in progress"); 3016 rc = SQLITE_BUSY; 3017 }else if( desiredAutoCommit!=db->autoCommit ){ 3018 if( iRollback ){ 3019 assert( desiredAutoCommit==1 ); 3020 sqlite3RollbackAll(db, SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK); 3021 db->autoCommit = 1; 3022 }else if( (rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1))!=SQLITE_OK ){ 3023 goto vdbe_return; 3024 }else{ 3025 db->autoCommit = (u8)desiredAutoCommit; 3026 } 3027 if( sqlite3VdbeHalt(p)==SQLITE_BUSY ){ 3028 p->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp); 3029 db->autoCommit = (u8)(1-desiredAutoCommit); 3030 p->rc = rc = SQLITE_BUSY; 3031 goto vdbe_return; 3032 } 3033 assert( db->nStatement==0 ); 3034 sqlite3CloseSavepoints(db); 3035 if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 3036 rc = SQLITE_DONE; 3037 }else{ 3038 rc = SQLITE_ERROR; 3039 } 3040 goto vdbe_return; 3041 }else{ 3042 sqlite3VdbeError(p, 3043 (!desiredAutoCommit)?"cannot start a transaction within a transaction":( 3044 (iRollback)?"cannot rollback - no transaction is active": 3045 "cannot commit - no transaction is active")); 3046 3047 rc = SQLITE_ERROR; 3048 } 3049 break; 3050 } 3051 3052 /* Opcode: Transaction P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 3053 ** 3054 ** Begin a transaction on database P1 if a transaction is not already 3055 ** active. 3056 ** If P2 is non-zero, then a write-transaction is started, or if a 3057 ** read-transaction is already active, it is upgraded to a write-transaction. 3058 ** If P2 is zero, then a read-transaction is started. 3059 ** 3060 ** P1 is the index of the database file on which the transaction is 3061 ** started. Index 0 is the main database file and index 1 is the 3062 ** file used for temporary tables. Indices of 2 or more are used for 3063 ** attached databases. 3064 ** 3065 ** If a write-transaction is started and the Vdbe.usesStmtJournal flag is 3066 ** true (this flag is set if the Vdbe may modify more than one row and may 3067 ** throw an ABORT exception), a statement transaction may also be opened. 3068 ** More specifically, a statement transaction is opened iff the database 3069 ** connection is currently not in autocommit mode, or if there are other 3070 ** active statements. A statement transaction allows the changes made by this 3071 ** VDBE to be rolled back after an error without having to roll back the 3072 ** entire transaction. If no error is encountered, the statement transaction 3073 ** will automatically commit when the VDBE halts. 3074 ** 3075 ** If P5!=0 then this opcode also checks the schema cookie against P3 3076 ** and the schema generation counter against P4. 3077 ** The cookie changes its value whenever the database schema changes. 3078 ** This operation is used to detect when that the cookie has changed 3079 ** and that the current process needs to reread the schema. If the schema 3080 ** cookie in P3 differs from the schema cookie in the database header or 3081 ** if the schema generation counter in P4 differs from the current 3082 ** generation counter, then an SQLITE_SCHEMA error is raised and execution 3083 ** halts. The sqlite3_step() wrapper function might then reprepare the 3084 ** statement and rerun it from the beginning. 3085 */ 3086 case OP_Transaction: { 3087 Btree *pBt; 3088 int iMeta; 3089 int iGen; 3090 3091 assert( p->bIsReader ); 3092 assert( p->readOnly==0 || pOp->p2==0 ); 3093 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); 3094 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p1) ); 3095 if( pOp->p2 && (db->flags & SQLITE_QueryOnly)!=0 ){ 3096 rc = SQLITE_READONLY; 3097 goto abort_due_to_error; 3098 } 3099 pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt; 3100 3101 if( pBt ){ 3102 rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pBt, pOp->p2); 3103 testcase( rc==SQLITE_BUSY_SNAPSHOT ); 3104 testcase( rc==SQLITE_BUSY_RECOVERY ); 3105 if( (rc&0xff)==SQLITE_BUSY ){ 3106 p->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp); 3107 p->rc = rc; 3108 goto vdbe_return; 3109 } 3110 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 3111 goto abort_due_to_error; 3112 } 3113 3114 if( pOp->p2 && p->usesStmtJournal 3115 && (db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVdbeRead>1) 3116 ){ 3117 assert( sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(pBt) ); 3118 if( p->iStatement==0 ){ 3119 assert( db->nStatement>=0 && db->nSavepoint>=0 ); 3120 db->nStatement++; 3121 p->iStatement = db->nSavepoint + db->nStatement; 3122 } 3123 3124 rc = sqlite3VtabSavepoint(db, SAVEPOINT_BEGIN, p->iStatement-1); 3125 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 3126 rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginStmt(pBt, p->iStatement); 3127 } 3128 3129 /* Store the current value of the database handles deferred constraint 3130 ** counter. If the statement transaction needs to be rolled back, 3131 ** the value of this counter needs to be restored too. */ 3132 p->nStmtDefCons = db->nDeferredCons; 3133 p->nStmtDefImmCons = db->nDeferredImmCons; 3134 } 3135 3136 /* Gather the schema version number for checking: 3137 ** IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-32195-19465 The schema version is used by SQLite 3138 ** each time a query is executed to ensure that the internal cache of the 3139 ** schema used when compiling the SQL query matches the schema of the 3140 ** database against which the compiled query is actually executed. 3141 */ 3142 sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(pBt, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION, (u32 *)&iMeta); 3143 iGen = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pSchema->iGeneration; 3144 }else{ 3145 iGen = iMeta = 0; 3146 } 3147 assert( pOp->p5==0 || pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); 3148 if( pOp->p5 && (iMeta!=pOp->p3 || iGen!=pOp->p4.i) ){ 3149 sqlite3DbFree(db, p->zErrMsg); 3150 p->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, "database schema has changed"); 3151 /* If the schema-cookie from the database file matches the cookie 3152 ** stored with the in-memory representation of the schema, do 3153 ** not reload the schema from the database file. 3154 ** 3155 ** If virtual-tables are in use, this is not just an optimization. 3156 ** Often, v-tables store their data in other SQLite tables, which 3157 ** are queried from within xNext() and other v-table methods using 3158 ** prepared queries. If such a query is out-of-date, we do not want to 3159 ** discard the database schema, as the user code implementing the 3160 ** v-table would have to be ready for the sqlite3_vtab structure itself 3161 ** to be invalidated whenever sqlite3_step() is called from within 3162 ** a v-table method. 3163 */ 3164 if( db->aDb[pOp->p1].pSchema->schema_cookie!=iMeta ){ 3165 sqlite3ResetOneSchema(db, pOp->p1); 3166 } 3167 p->expired = 1; 3168 rc = SQLITE_SCHEMA; 3169 } 3170 break; 3171 } 3172 3173 /* Opcode: ReadCookie P1 P2 P3 * * 3174 ** 3175 ** Read cookie number P3 from database P1 and write it into register P2. 3176 ** P3==1 is the schema version. P3==2 is the database format. 3177 ** P3==3 is the recommended pager cache size, and so forth. P1==0 is 3178 ** the main database file and P1==1 is the database file used to store 3179 ** temporary tables. 3180 ** 3181 ** There must be a read-lock on the database (either a transaction 3182 ** must be started or there must be an open cursor) before 3183 ** executing this instruction. 3184 */ 3185 case OP_ReadCookie: { /* out2 */ 3186 int iMeta; 3187 int iDb; 3188 int iCookie; 3189 3190 assert( p->bIsReader ); 3191 iDb = pOp->p1; 3192 iCookie = pOp->p3; 3193 assert( pOp->p3<SQLITE_N_BTREE_META ); 3194 assert( iDb>=0 && iDb<db->nDb ); 3195 assert( db->aDb[iDb].pBt!=0 ); 3196 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, iDb) ); 3197 3198 sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(db->aDb[iDb].pBt, iCookie, (u32 *)&iMeta); 3199 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 3200 pOut->u.i = iMeta; 3201 break; 3202 } 3203 3204 /* Opcode: SetCookie P1 P2 P3 * * 3205 ** 3206 ** Write the content of register P3 (interpreted as an integer) 3207 ** into cookie number P2 of database P1. P2==1 is the schema version. 3208 ** P2==2 is the database format. P2==3 is the recommended pager cache 3209 ** size, and so forth. P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the 3210 ** database file used to store temporary tables. 3211 ** 3212 ** A transaction must be started before executing this opcode. 3213 */ 3214 case OP_SetCookie: { /* in3 */ 3215 Db *pDb; 3216 assert( pOp->p2<SQLITE_N_BTREE_META ); 3217 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); 3218 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p1) ); 3219 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 3220 pDb = &db->aDb[pOp->p1]; 3221 assert( pDb->pBt!=0 ); 3222 assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, pOp->p1, 0) ); 3223 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 3224 sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn3); 3225 /* See note about index shifting on OP_ReadCookie */ 3226 rc = sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta(pDb->pBt, pOp->p2, (int)pIn3->u.i); 3227 if( pOp->p2==BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION ){ 3228 /* When the schema cookie changes, record the new cookie internally */ 3229 pDb->pSchema->schema_cookie = (int)pIn3->u.i; 3230 db->flags |= SQLITE_InternChanges; 3231 }else if( pOp->p2==BTREE_FILE_FORMAT ){ 3232 /* Record changes in the file format */ 3233 pDb->pSchema->file_format = (u8)pIn3->u.i; 3234 } 3235 if( pOp->p1==1 ){ 3236 /* Invalidate all prepared statements whenever the TEMP database 3237 ** schema is changed. Ticket #1644 */ 3238 sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db); 3239 p->expired = 0; 3240 } 3241 break; 3242 } 3243 3244 /* Opcode: OpenRead P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 3245 ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3 3246 ** 3247 ** Open a read-only cursor for the database table whose root page is 3248 ** P2 in a database file. The database file is determined by P3. 3249 ** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for 3250 ** temporary tables, and P3>1 means used the corresponding attached 3251 ** database. Give the new cursor an identifier of P1. The P1 3252 ** values need not be contiguous but all P1 values should be small integers. 3253 ** It is an error for P1 to be negative. 3254 ** 3255 ** If P5!=0 then use the content of register P2 as the root page, not 3256 ** the value of P2 itself. 3257 ** 3258 ** There will be a read lock on the database whenever there is an 3259 ** open cursor. If the database was unlocked prior to this instruction 3260 ** then a read lock is acquired as part of this instruction. A read 3261 ** lock allows other processes to read the database but prohibits 3262 ** any other process from modifying the database. The read lock is 3263 ** released when all cursors are closed. If this instruction attempts 3264 ** to get a read lock but fails, the script terminates with an 3265 ** SQLITE_BUSY error code. 3266 ** 3267 ** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to 3268 ** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo 3269 ** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating 3270 ** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer 3271 ** value, it is set to the number of columns in the table. 3272 ** 3273 ** See also: OpenWrite, ReopenIdx 3274 */ 3275 /* Opcode: ReopenIdx P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 3276 ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3 3277 ** 3278 ** The ReopenIdx opcode works exactly like ReadOpen except that it first 3279 ** checks to see if the cursor on P1 is already open with a root page 3280 ** number of P2 and if it is this opcode becomes a no-op. In other words, 3281 ** if the cursor is already open, do not reopen it. 3282 ** 3283 ** The ReopenIdx opcode may only be used with P5==0 and with P4 being 3284 ** a P4_KEYINFO object. Furthermore, the P3 value must be the same as 3285 ** every other ReopenIdx or OpenRead for the same cursor number. 3286 ** 3287 ** See the OpenRead opcode documentation for additional information. 3288 */ 3289 /* Opcode: OpenWrite P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 3290 ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3 3291 ** 3292 ** Open a read/write cursor named P1 on the table or index whose root 3293 ** page is P2. Or if P5!=0 use the content of register P2 to find the 3294 ** root page. 3295 ** 3296 ** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to 3297 ** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo 3298 ** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating 3299 ** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer 3300 ** value, it is set to the number of columns in the table, or to the 3301 ** largest index of any column of the table that is actually used. 3302 ** 3303 ** This instruction works just like OpenRead except that it opens the cursor 3304 ** in read/write mode. For a given table, there can be one or more read-only 3305 ** cursors or a single read/write cursor but not both. 3306 ** 3307 ** See also OpenRead. 3308 */ 3309 case OP_ReopenIdx: { 3310 int nField; 3311 KeyInfo *pKeyInfo; 3312 int p2; 3313 int iDb; 3314 int wrFlag; 3315 Btree *pX; 3316 VdbeCursor *pCur; 3317 Db *pDb; 3318 3319 assert( pOp->p5==0 || pOp->p5==OPFLAG_SEEKEQ ); 3320 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO ); 3321 pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 3322 if( pCur && pCur->pgnoRoot==(u32)pOp->p2 ){ 3323 assert( pCur->iDb==pOp->p3 ); /* Guaranteed by the code generator */ 3324 goto open_cursor_set_hints; 3325 } 3326 /* If the cursor is not currently open or is open on a different 3327 ** index, then fall through into OP_OpenRead to force a reopen */ 3328 case OP_OpenRead: 3329 case OP_OpenWrite: 3330 3331 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenWrite || pOp->p5==0 || pOp->p5==OPFLAG_SEEKEQ ); 3332 assert( p->bIsReader ); 3333 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenRead || pOp->opcode==OP_ReopenIdx 3334 || p->readOnly==0 ); 3335 3336 if( p->expired ){ 3337 rc = SQLITE_ABORT_ROLLBACK; 3338 break; 3339 } 3340 3341 nField = 0; 3342 pKeyInfo = 0; 3343 p2 = pOp->p2; 3344 iDb = pOp->p3; 3345 assert( iDb>=0 && iDb<db->nDb ); 3346 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, iDb) ); 3347 pDb = &db->aDb[iDb]; 3348 pX = pDb->pBt; 3349 assert( pX!=0 ); 3350 if( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenWrite ){ 3351 assert( OPFLAG_FORDELETE==BTREE_FORDELETE ); 3352 wrFlag = BTREE_WRCSR | (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_FORDELETE); 3353 assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, iDb, 0) ); 3354 if( pDb->pSchema->file_format < p->minWriteFileFormat ){ 3355 p->minWriteFileFormat = pDb->pSchema->file_format; 3356 } 3357 }else{ 3358 wrFlag = 0; 3359 } 3360 if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_P2ISREG ){ 3361 assert( p2>0 ); 3362 assert( p2<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 3363 pIn2 = &aMem[p2]; 3364 assert( memIsValid(pIn2) ); 3365 assert( (pIn2->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ); 3366 sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn2); 3367 p2 = (int)pIn2->u.i; 3368 /* The p2 value always comes from a prior OP_CreateTable opcode and 3369 ** that opcode will always set the p2 value to 2 or more or else fail. 3370 ** If there were a failure, the prepared statement would have halted 3371 ** before reaching this instruction. */ 3372 if( NEVER(p2<2) ) { 3373 rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; 3374 goto abort_due_to_error; 3375 } 3376 } 3377 if( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO ){ 3378 pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo; 3379 assert( pKeyInfo->enc==ENC(db) ); 3380 assert( pKeyInfo->db==db ); 3381 nField = pKeyInfo->nField+pKeyInfo->nXField; 3382 }else if( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ){ 3383 nField = pOp->p4.i; 3384 } 3385 assert( pOp->p1>=0 ); 3386 assert( nField>=0 ); 3387 testcase( nField==0 ); /* Table with INTEGER PRIMARY KEY and nothing else */ 3388 pCur = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, nField, iDb, CURTYPE_BTREE); 3389 if( pCur==0 ) goto no_mem; 3390 pCur->nullRow = 1; 3391 pCur->isOrdered = 1; 3392 pCur->pgnoRoot = p2; 3393 rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pX, p2, wrFlag, pKeyInfo, pCur->uc.pCursor); 3394 pCur->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo; 3395 /* Set the VdbeCursor.isTable variable. Previous versions of 3396 ** SQLite used to check if the root-page flags were sane at this point 3397 ** and report database corruption if they were not, but this check has 3398 ** since moved into the btree layer. */ 3399 pCur->isTable = pOp->p4type!=P4_KEYINFO; 3400 3401 open_cursor_set_hints: 3402 assert( OPFLAG_BULKCSR==BTREE_BULKLOAD ); 3403 assert( OPFLAG_SEEKEQ==BTREE_SEEK_EQ ); 3404 testcase( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_BULKCSR ); 3405 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS 3406 testcase( pOp->p2 & OPFLAG_SEEKEQ ); 3407 #endif 3408 sqlite3BtreeCursorHintFlags(pCur->uc.pCursor, 3409 (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_BULKCSR|OPFLAG_SEEKEQ))); 3410 break; 3411 } 3412 3413 /* Opcode: OpenEphemeral P1 P2 * P4 P5 3414 ** Synopsis: nColumn=P2 3415 ** 3416 ** Open a new cursor P1 to a transient table. 3417 ** The cursor is always opened read/write even if 3418 ** the main database is read-only. The ephemeral 3419 ** table is deleted automatically when the cursor is closed. 3420 ** 3421 ** P2 is the number of columns in the ephemeral table. 3422 ** The cursor points to a BTree table if P4==0 and to a BTree index 3423 ** if P4 is not 0. If P4 is not NULL, it points to a KeyInfo structure 3424 ** that defines the format of keys in the index. 3425 ** 3426 ** The P5 parameter can be a mask of the BTREE_* flags defined 3427 ** in btree.h. These flags control aspects of the operation of 3428 ** the btree. The BTREE_OMIT_JOURNAL and BTREE_SINGLE flags are 3429 ** added automatically. 3430 */ 3431 /* Opcode: OpenAutoindex P1 P2 * P4 * 3432 ** Synopsis: nColumn=P2 3433 ** 3434 ** This opcode works the same as OP_OpenEphemeral. It has a 3435 ** different name to distinguish its use. Tables created using 3436 ** by this opcode will be used for automatically created transient 3437 ** indices in joins. 3438 */ 3439 case OP_OpenAutoindex: 3440 case OP_OpenEphemeral: { 3441 VdbeCursor *pCx; 3442 KeyInfo *pKeyInfo; 3443 3444 static const int vfsFlags = 3445 SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | 3446 SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | 3447 SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE | 3448 SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE | 3449 SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB; 3450 assert( pOp->p1>=0 ); 3451 assert( pOp->p2>=0 ); 3452 pCx = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, -1, CURTYPE_BTREE); 3453 if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem; 3454 pCx->nullRow = 1; 3455 pCx->isEphemeral = 1; 3456 rc = sqlite3BtreeOpen(db->pVfs, 0, db, &pCx->pBt, 3457 BTREE_OMIT_JOURNAL | BTREE_SINGLE | pOp->p5, vfsFlags); 3458 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 3459 rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pCx->pBt, 1); 3460 } 3461 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 3462 /* If a transient index is required, create it by calling 3463 ** sqlite3BtreeCreateTable() with the BTREE_BLOBKEY flag before 3464 ** opening it. If a transient table is required, just use the 3465 ** automatically created table with root-page 1 (an BLOB_INTKEY table). 3466 */ 3467 if( (pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo)!=0 ){ 3468 int pgno; 3469 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO ); 3470 rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pCx->pBt, &pgno, BTREE_BLOBKEY | pOp->p5); 3471 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 3472 assert( pgno==MASTER_ROOT+1 ); 3473 assert( pKeyInfo->db==db ); 3474 assert( pKeyInfo->enc==ENC(db) ); 3475 pCx->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo; 3476 rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->pBt, pgno, BTREE_WRCSR, 3477 pKeyInfo, pCx->uc.pCursor); 3478 } 3479 pCx->isTable = 0; 3480 }else{ 3481 rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->pBt, MASTER_ROOT, BTREE_WRCSR, 3482 0, pCx->uc.pCursor); 3483 pCx->isTable = 1; 3484 } 3485 } 3486 pCx->isOrdered = (pOp->p5!=BTREE_UNORDERED); 3487 break; 3488 } 3489 3490 /* Opcode: SorterOpen P1 P2 P3 P4 * 3491 ** 3492 ** This opcode works like OP_OpenEphemeral except that it opens 3493 ** a transient index that is specifically designed to sort large 3494 ** tables using an external merge-sort algorithm. 3495 ** 3496 ** If argument P3 is non-zero, then it indicates that the sorter may 3497 ** assume that a stable sort considering the first P3 fields of each 3498 ** key is sufficient to produce the required results. 3499 */ 3500 case OP_SorterOpen: { 3501 VdbeCursor *pCx; 3502 3503 assert( pOp->p1>=0 ); 3504 assert( pOp->p2>=0 ); 3505 pCx = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, -1, CURTYPE_SORTER); 3506 if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem; 3507 pCx->pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo; 3508 assert( pCx->pKeyInfo->db==db ); 3509 assert( pCx->pKeyInfo->enc==ENC(db) ); 3510 rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterInit(db, pOp->p3, pCx); 3511 break; 3512 } 3513 3514 /* Opcode: SequenceTest P1 P2 * * * 3515 ** Synopsis: if( cursor[P1].ctr++ ) pc = P2 3516 ** 3517 ** P1 is a sorter cursor. If the sequence counter is currently zero, jump 3518 ** to P2. Regardless of whether or not the jump is taken, increment the 3519 ** the sequence value. 3520 */ 3521 case OP_SequenceTest: { 3522 VdbeCursor *pC; 3523 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 3524 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 3525 assert( isSorter(pC) ); 3526 if( (pC->seqCount++)==0 ){ 3527 goto jump_to_p2; 3528 } 3529 break; 3530 } 3531 3532 /* Opcode: OpenPseudo P1 P2 P3 * * 3533 ** Synopsis: P3 columns in r[P2] 3534 ** 3535 ** Open a new cursor that points to a fake table that contains a single 3536 ** row of data. The content of that one row is the content of memory 3537 ** register P2. In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the 3538 ** MEM_Blob content contained in register P2. 3539 ** 3540 ** A pseudo-table created by this opcode is used to hold a single 3541 ** row output from the sorter so that the row can be decomposed into 3542 ** individual columns using the OP_Column opcode. The OP_Column opcode 3543 ** is the only cursor opcode that works with a pseudo-table. 3544 ** 3545 ** P3 is the number of fields in the records that will be stored by 3546 ** the pseudo-table. 3547 */ 3548 case OP_OpenPseudo: { 3549 VdbeCursor *pCx; 3550 3551 assert( pOp->p1>=0 ); 3552 assert( pOp->p3>=0 ); 3553 pCx = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, pOp->p3, -1, CURTYPE_PSEUDO); 3554 if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem; 3555 pCx->nullRow = 1; 3556 pCx->uc.pseudoTableReg = pOp->p2; 3557 pCx->isTable = 1; 3558 assert( pOp->p5==0 ); 3559 break; 3560 } 3561 3562 /* Opcode: Close P1 * * * * 3563 ** 3564 ** Close a cursor previously opened as P1. If P1 is not 3565 ** currently open, this instruction is a no-op. 3566 */ 3567 case OP_Close: { 3568 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 3569 sqlite3VdbeFreeCursor(p, p->apCsr[pOp->p1]); 3570 p->apCsr[pOp->p1] = 0; 3571 break; 3572 } 3573 3574 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_USED_MASK 3575 /* Opcode: ColumnsUsed P1 * * P4 * 3576 ** 3577 ** This opcode (which only exists if SQLite was compiled with 3578 ** SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_USED_MASK) identifies which columns of the 3579 ** table or index for cursor P1 are used. P4 is a 64-bit integer 3580 ** (P4_INT64) in which the first 63 bits are one for each of the 3581 ** first 63 columns of the table or index that are actually used 3582 ** by the cursor. The high-order bit is set if any column after 3583 ** the 64th is used. 3584 */ 3585 case OP_ColumnsUsed: { 3586 VdbeCursor *pC; 3587 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 3588 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 3589 pC->maskUsed = *(u64*)pOp->p4.pI64; 3590 break; 3591 } 3592 #endif 3593 3594 /* Opcode: SeekGE P1 P2 P3 P4 * 3595 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 3596 ** 3597 ** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), 3598 ** use the value in register P3 as the key. If cursor P1 refers 3599 ** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers 3600 ** that are used as an unpacked index key. 3601 ** 3602 ** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that 3603 ** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records 3604 ** greater than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. 3605 ** 3606 ** If the cursor P1 was opened using the OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flag, then this 3607 ** opcode will always land on a record that equally equals the key, or 3608 ** else jump immediately to P2. When the cursor is OPFLAG_SEEKEQ, this 3609 ** opcode must be followed by an IdxLE opcode with the same arguments. 3610 ** The IdxLE opcode will be skipped if this opcode succeeds, but the 3611 ** IdxLE opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations. 3612 ** 3613 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order, 3614 ** from the beginning toward the end. In other words, the cursor is 3615 ** configured to use Next, not Prev. 3616 ** 3617 ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekLt, SeekGt, SeekLe 3618 */ 3619 /* Opcode: SeekGT P1 P2 P3 P4 * 3620 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 3621 ** 3622 ** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), 3623 ** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers 3624 ** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers 3625 ** that are used as an unpacked index key. 3626 ** 3627 ** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that 3628 ** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than 3629 ** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. 3630 ** 3631 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order, 3632 ** from the beginning toward the end. In other words, the cursor is 3633 ** configured to use Next, not Prev. 3634 ** 3635 ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekLt, SeekGe, SeekLe 3636 */ 3637 /* Opcode: SeekLT P1 P2 P3 P4 * 3638 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 3639 ** 3640 ** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), 3641 ** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers 3642 ** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers 3643 ** that are used as an unpacked index key. 3644 ** 3645 ** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that 3646 ** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than 3647 ** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. 3648 ** 3649 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order, 3650 ** from the end toward the beginning. In other words, the cursor is 3651 ** configured to use Prev, not Next. 3652 ** 3653 ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekGt, SeekGe, SeekLe 3654 */ 3655 /* Opcode: SeekLE P1 P2 P3 P4 * 3656 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 3657 ** 3658 ** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), 3659 ** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers 3660 ** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers 3661 ** that are used as an unpacked index key. 3662 ** 3663 ** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that 3664 ** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records 3665 ** less than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. 3666 ** 3667 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order, 3668 ** from the end toward the beginning. In other words, the cursor is 3669 ** configured to use Prev, not Next. 3670 ** 3671 ** If the cursor P1 was opened using the OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flag, then this 3672 ** opcode will always land on a record that equally equals the key, or 3673 ** else jump immediately to P2. When the cursor is OPFLAG_SEEKEQ, this 3674 ** opcode must be followed by an IdxGE opcode with the same arguments. 3675 ** The IdxGE opcode will be skipped if this opcode succeeds, but the 3676 ** IdxGE opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations. 3677 ** 3678 ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekGt, SeekGe, SeekLt 3679 */ 3680 case OP_SeekLT: /* jump, in3 */ 3681 case OP_SeekLE: /* jump, in3 */ 3682 case OP_SeekGE: /* jump, in3 */ 3683 case OP_SeekGT: { /* jump, in3 */ 3684 int res; /* Comparison result */ 3685 int oc; /* Opcode */ 3686 VdbeCursor *pC; /* The cursor to seek */ 3687 UnpackedRecord r; /* The key to seek for */ 3688 int nField; /* Number of columns or fields in the key */ 3689 i64 iKey; /* The rowid we are to seek to */ 3690 int eqOnly; /* Only interested in == results */ 3691 3692 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 3693 assert( pOp->p2!=0 ); 3694 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 3695 assert( pC!=0 ); 3696 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 3697 assert( OP_SeekLE == OP_SeekLT+1 ); 3698 assert( OP_SeekGE == OP_SeekLT+2 ); 3699 assert( OP_SeekGT == OP_SeekLT+3 ); 3700 assert( pC->isOrdered ); 3701 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 3702 oc = pOp->opcode; 3703 eqOnly = 0; 3704 pC->nullRow = 0; 3705 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 3706 pC->seekOp = pOp->opcode; 3707 #endif 3708 3709 if( pC->isTable ){ 3710 /* The BTREE_SEEK_EQ flag is only set on index cursors */ 3711 assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorHasHint(pC->uc.pCursor, BTREE_SEEK_EQ)==0 ); 3712 3713 /* The input value in P3 might be of any type: integer, real, string, 3714 ** blob, or NULL. But it needs to be an integer before we can do 3715 ** the seek, so convert it. */ 3716 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 3717 if( (pIn3->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_Str))==MEM_Str ){ 3718 applyNumericAffinity(pIn3, 0); 3719 } 3720 iKey = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn3); 3721 3722 /* If the P3 value could not be converted into an integer without 3723 ** loss of information, then special processing is required... */ 3724 if( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){ 3725 if( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Real)==0 ){ 3726 /* If the P3 value cannot be converted into any kind of a number, 3727 ** then the seek is not possible, so jump to P2 */ 3728 VdbeBranchTaken(1,2); goto jump_to_p2; 3729 break; 3730 } 3731 3732 /* If the approximation iKey is larger than the actual real search 3733 ** term, substitute >= for > and < for <=. e.g. if the search term 3734 ** is 4.9 and the integer approximation 5: 3735 ** 3736 ** (x > 4.9) -> (x >= 5) 3737 ** (x <= 4.9) -> (x < 5) 3738 */ 3739 if( pIn3->u.r<(double)iKey ){ 3740 assert( OP_SeekGE==(OP_SeekGT-1) ); 3741 assert( OP_SeekLT==(OP_SeekLE-1) ); 3742 assert( (OP_SeekLE & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekGT & 0x0001) ); 3743 if( (oc & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekGT & 0x0001) ) oc--; 3744 } 3745 3746 /* If the approximation iKey is smaller than the actual real search 3747 ** term, substitute <= for < and > for >=. */ 3748 else if( pIn3->u.r>(double)iKey ){ 3749 assert( OP_SeekLE==(OP_SeekLT+1) ); 3750 assert( OP_SeekGT==(OP_SeekGE+1) ); 3751 assert( (OP_SeekLT & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekGE & 0x0001) ); 3752 if( (oc & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekLT & 0x0001) ) oc++; 3753 } 3754 } 3755 rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pC->uc.pCursor, 0, (u64)iKey, 0, &res); 3756 pC->movetoTarget = iKey; /* Used by OP_Delete */ 3757 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 3758 goto abort_due_to_error; 3759 } 3760 }else{ 3761 /* For a cursor with the BTREE_SEEK_EQ hint, only the OP_SeekGE and 3762 ** OP_SeekLE opcodes are allowed, and these must be immediately followed 3763 ** by an OP_IdxGT or OP_IdxLT opcode, respectively, with the same key. 3764 */ 3765 if( sqlite3BtreeCursorHasHint(pC->uc.pCursor, BTREE_SEEK_EQ) ){ 3766 eqOnly = 1; 3767 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_SeekGE || pOp->opcode==OP_SeekLE ); 3768 assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxLT || pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxGT ); 3769 assert( pOp[1].p1==pOp[0].p1 ); 3770 assert( pOp[1].p2==pOp[0].p2 ); 3771 assert( pOp[1].p3==pOp[0].p3 ); 3772 assert( pOp[1].p4.i==pOp[0].p4.i ); 3773 } 3774 3775 nField = pOp->p4.i; 3776 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); 3777 assert( nField>0 ); 3778 r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo; 3779 r.nField = (u16)nField; 3780 3781 /* The next line of code computes as follows, only faster: 3782 ** if( oc==OP_SeekGT || oc==OP_SeekLE ){ 3783 ** r.default_rc = -1; 3784 ** }else{ 3785 ** r.default_rc = +1; 3786 ** } 3787 */ 3788 r.default_rc = ((1 & (oc - OP_SeekLT)) ? -1 : +1); 3789 assert( oc!=OP_SeekGT || r.default_rc==-1 ); 3790 assert( oc!=OP_SeekLE || r.default_rc==-1 ); 3791 assert( oc!=OP_SeekGE || r.default_rc==+1 ); 3792 assert( oc!=OP_SeekLT || r.default_rc==+1 ); 3793 3794 r.aMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 3795 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 3796 { int i; for(i=0; i<r.nField; i++) assert( memIsValid(&r.aMem[i]) ); } 3797 #endif 3798 ExpandBlob(r.aMem); 3799 r.eqSeen = 0; 3800 rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pC->uc.pCursor, &r, 0, 0, &res); 3801 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 3802 goto abort_due_to_error; 3803 } 3804 if( eqOnly && r.eqSeen==0 ){ 3805 assert( res!=0 ); 3806 goto seek_not_found; 3807 } 3808 } 3809 pC->deferredMoveto = 0; 3810 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 3811 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 3812 sqlite3_search_count++; 3813 #endif 3814 if( oc>=OP_SeekGE ){ assert( oc==OP_SeekGE || oc==OP_SeekGT ); 3815 if( res<0 || (res==0 && oc==OP_SeekGT) ){ 3816 res = 0; 3817 rc = sqlite3BtreeNext(pC->uc.pCursor, &res); 3818 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; 3819 }else{ 3820 res = 0; 3821 } 3822 }else{ 3823 assert( oc==OP_SeekLT || oc==OP_SeekLE ); 3824 if( res>0 || (res==0 && oc==OP_SeekLT) ){ 3825 res = 0; 3826 rc = sqlite3BtreePrevious(pC->uc.pCursor, &res); 3827 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; 3828 }else{ 3829 /* res might be negative because the table is empty. Check to 3830 ** see if this is the case. 3831 */ 3832 res = sqlite3BtreeEof(pC->uc.pCursor); 3833 } 3834 } 3835 seek_not_found: 3836 assert( pOp->p2>0 ); 3837 VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); 3838 if( res ){ 3839 goto jump_to_p2; 3840 }else if( eqOnly ){ 3841 assert( pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxLT || pOp[1].opcode==OP_IdxGT ); 3842 pOp++; /* Skip the OP_IdxLt or OP_IdxGT that follows */ 3843 } 3844 break; 3845 } 3846 3847 /* Opcode: Seek P1 P2 * * * 3848 ** Synopsis: intkey=r[P2] 3849 ** 3850 ** P1 is an open table cursor and P2 is a rowid integer. Arrange 3851 ** for P1 to move so that it points to the rowid given by P2. 3852 ** 3853 ** This is actually a deferred seek. Nothing actually happens until 3854 ** the cursor is used to read a record. That way, if no reads 3855 ** occur, no unnecessary I/O happens. 3856 */ 3857 case OP_Seek: { /* in2 */ 3858 VdbeCursor *pC; 3859 3860 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 3861 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 3862 assert( pC!=0 ); 3863 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 3864 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 3865 assert( pC->isTable ); 3866 pC->nullRow = 0; 3867 pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 3868 pC->movetoTarget = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pIn2); 3869 pC->deferredMoveto = 1; 3870 break; 3871 } 3872 3873 3874 /* Opcode: Found P1 P2 P3 P4 * 3875 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 3876 ** 3877 ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If 3878 ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked 3879 ** record. 3880 ** 3881 ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4 3882 ** is a prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2 and 3883 ** P1 is left pointing at the matching entry. 3884 ** 3885 ** This operation leaves the cursor in a state where it can be 3886 ** advanced in the forward direction. The Next instruction will work, 3887 ** but not the Prev instruction. 3888 ** 3889 ** See also: NotFound, NoConflict, NotExists. SeekGe 3890 */ 3891 /* Opcode: NotFound P1 P2 P3 P4 * 3892 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 3893 ** 3894 ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If 3895 ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked 3896 ** record. 3897 ** 3898 ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4 3899 ** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2. If P1 3900 ** does contain an entry whose prefix matches the P3/P4 record then control 3901 ** falls through to the next instruction and P1 is left pointing at the 3902 ** matching entry. 3903 ** 3904 ** This operation leaves the cursor in a state where it cannot be 3905 ** advanced in either direction. In other words, the Next and Prev 3906 ** opcodes do not work after this operation. 3907 ** 3908 ** See also: Found, NotExists, NoConflict 3909 */ 3910 /* Opcode: NoConflict P1 P2 P3 P4 * 3911 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 3912 ** 3913 ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If 3914 ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked 3915 ** record. 3916 ** 3917 ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4 3918 ** contains any NULL value, jump immediately to P2. If all terms of the 3919 ** record are not-NULL then a check is done to determine if any row in the 3920 ** P1 index btree has a matching key prefix. If there are no matches, jump 3921 ** immediately to P2. If there is a match, fall through and leave the P1 3922 ** cursor pointing to the matching row. 3923 ** 3924 ** This opcode is similar to OP_NotFound with the exceptions that the 3925 ** branch is always taken if any part of the search key input is NULL. 3926 ** 3927 ** This operation leaves the cursor in a state where it cannot be 3928 ** advanced in either direction. In other words, the Next and Prev 3929 ** opcodes do not work after this operation. 3930 ** 3931 ** See also: NotFound, Found, NotExists 3932 */ 3933 case OP_NoConflict: /* jump, in3 */ 3934 case OP_NotFound: /* jump, in3 */ 3935 case OP_Found: { /* jump, in3 */ 3936 int alreadyExists; 3937 int takeJump; 3938 int ii; 3939 VdbeCursor *pC; 3940 int res; 3941 char *pFree; 3942 UnpackedRecord *pIdxKey; 3943 UnpackedRecord r; 3944 char aTempRec[ROUND8(sizeof(UnpackedRecord)) + sizeof(Mem)*4 + 7]; 3945 3946 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 3947 if( pOp->opcode!=OP_NoConflict ) sqlite3_found_count++; 3948 #endif 3949 3950 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 3951 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); 3952 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 3953 assert( pC!=0 ); 3954 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 3955 pC->seekOp = pOp->opcode; 3956 #endif 3957 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 3958 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 3959 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 3960 assert( pC->isTable==0 ); 3961 pFree = 0; 3962 if( pOp->p4.i>0 ){ 3963 r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo; 3964 r.nField = (u16)pOp->p4.i; 3965 r.aMem = pIn3; 3966 for(ii=0; ii<r.nField; ii++){ 3967 assert( memIsValid(&r.aMem[ii]) ); 3968 ExpandBlob(&r.aMem[ii]); 3969 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 3970 if( ii ) REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3+ii, &r.aMem[ii]); 3971 #endif 3972 } 3973 pIdxKey = &r; 3974 }else{ 3975 pIdxKey = sqlite3VdbeAllocUnpackedRecord( 3976 pC->pKeyInfo, aTempRec, sizeof(aTempRec), &pFree 3977 ); 3978 if( pIdxKey==0 ) goto no_mem; 3979 assert( pIn3->flags & MEM_Blob ); 3980 ExpandBlob(pIn3); 3981 sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack(pC->pKeyInfo, pIn3->n, pIn3->z, pIdxKey); 3982 } 3983 pIdxKey->default_rc = 0; 3984 takeJump = 0; 3985 if( pOp->opcode==OP_NoConflict ){ 3986 /* For the OP_NoConflict opcode, take the jump if any of the 3987 ** input fields are NULL, since any key with a NULL will not 3988 ** conflict */ 3989 for(ii=0; ii<pIdxKey->nField; ii++){ 3990 if( pIdxKey->aMem[ii].flags & MEM_Null ){ 3991 takeJump = 1; 3992 break; 3993 } 3994 } 3995 } 3996 rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pC->uc.pCursor, pIdxKey, 0, 0, &res); 3997 sqlite3DbFree(db, pFree); 3998 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 3999 break; 4000 } 4001 pC->seekResult = res; 4002 alreadyExists = (res==0); 4003 pC->nullRow = 1-alreadyExists; 4004 pC->deferredMoveto = 0; 4005 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4006 if( pOp->opcode==OP_Found ){ 4007 VdbeBranchTaken(alreadyExists!=0,2); 4008 if( alreadyExists ) goto jump_to_p2; 4009 }else{ 4010 VdbeBranchTaken(takeJump||alreadyExists==0,2); 4011 if( takeJump || !alreadyExists ) goto jump_to_p2; 4012 } 4013 break; 4014 } 4015 4016 /* Opcode: NotExists P1 P2 P3 * * 4017 ** Synopsis: intkey=r[P3] 4018 ** 4019 ** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer 4020 ** keys). P3 is an integer rowid. If P1 does not contain a record with 4021 ** rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2. Or, if P2 is 0, raise an 4022 ** SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain a record with rowid P3 then 4023 ** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next 4024 ** instruction. 4025 ** 4026 ** The OP_NotFound opcode performs the same operation on index btrees 4027 ** (with arbitrary multi-value keys). 4028 ** 4029 ** This opcode leaves the cursor in a state where it cannot be advanced 4030 ** in either direction. In other words, the Next and Prev opcodes will 4031 ** not work following this opcode. 4032 ** 4033 ** See also: Found, NotFound, NoConflict 4034 */ 4035 case OP_NotExists: { /* jump, in3 */ 4036 VdbeCursor *pC; 4037 BtCursor *pCrsr; 4038 int res; 4039 u64 iKey; 4040 4041 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 4042 assert( pIn3->flags & MEM_Int ); 4043 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4044 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4045 assert( pC!=0 ); 4046 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 4047 pC->seekOp = 0; 4048 #endif 4049 assert( pC->isTable ); 4050 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4051 pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; 4052 assert( pCrsr!=0 ); 4053 res = 0; 4054 iKey = pIn3->u.i; 4055 rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pCrsr, 0, iKey, 0, &res); 4056 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || res==0 ); 4057 pC->movetoTarget = iKey; /* Used by OP_Delete */ 4058 pC->nullRow = 0; 4059 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4060 pC->deferredMoveto = 0; 4061 VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); 4062 pC->seekResult = res; 4063 if( res!=0 ){ 4064 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); 4065 if( pOp->p2==0 ){ 4066 rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; 4067 }else{ 4068 goto jump_to_p2; 4069 } 4070 } 4071 break; 4072 } 4073 4074 /* Opcode: Sequence P1 P2 * * * 4075 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=cursor[P1].ctr++ 4076 ** 4077 ** Find the next available sequence number for cursor P1. 4078 ** Write the sequence number into register P2. 4079 ** The sequence number on the cursor is incremented after this 4080 ** instruction. 4081 */ 4082 case OP_Sequence: { /* out2 */ 4083 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4084 assert( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]!=0 ); 4085 assert( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->eCurType!=CURTYPE_VTAB ); 4086 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 4087 pOut->u.i = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]->seqCount++; 4088 break; 4089 } 4090 4091 4092 /* Opcode: NewRowid P1 P2 P3 * * 4093 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=rowid 4094 ** 4095 ** Get a new integer record number (a.k.a "rowid") used as the key to a table. 4096 ** The record number is not previously used as a key in the database 4097 ** table that cursor P1 points to. The new record number is written 4098 ** written to register P2. 4099 ** 4100 ** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds 4101 ** the largest previously generated record number. No new record numbers are 4102 ** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum, 4103 ** an SQLITE_FULL error is generated. The P3 register is updated with the ' 4104 ** generated record number. This P3 mechanism is used to help implement the 4105 ** AUTOINCREMENT feature. 4106 */ 4107 case OP_NewRowid: { /* out2 */ 4108 i64 v; /* The new rowid */ 4109 VdbeCursor *pC; /* Cursor of table to get the new rowid */ 4110 int res; /* Result of an sqlite3BtreeLast() */ 4111 int cnt; /* Counter to limit the number of searches */ 4112 Mem *pMem; /* Register holding largest rowid for AUTOINCREMENT */ 4113 VdbeFrame *pFrame; /* Root frame of VDBE */ 4114 4115 v = 0; 4116 res = 0; 4117 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 4118 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4119 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4120 assert( pC!=0 ); 4121 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4122 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 4123 { 4124 /* The next rowid or record number (different terms for the same 4125 ** thing) is obtained in a two-step algorithm. 4126 ** 4127 ** First we attempt to find the largest existing rowid and add one 4128 ** to that. But if the largest existing rowid is already the maximum 4129 ** positive integer, we have to fall through to the second 4130 ** probabilistic algorithm 4131 ** 4132 ** The second algorithm is to select a rowid at random and see if 4133 ** it already exists in the table. If it does not exist, we have 4134 ** succeeded. If the random rowid does exist, we select a new one 4135 ** and try again, up to 100 times. 4136 */ 4137 assert( pC->isTable ); 4138 4139 #ifdef SQLITE_32BIT_ROWID 4140 # define MAX_ROWID 0x7fffffff 4141 #else 4142 /* Some compilers complain about constants of the form 0x7fffffffffffffff. 4143 ** Others complain about 0x7ffffffffffffffffLL. The following macro seems 4144 ** to provide the constant while making all compilers happy. 4145 */ 4146 # define MAX_ROWID (i64)( (((u64)0x7fffffff)<<32) | (u64)0xffffffff ) 4147 #endif 4148 4149 if( !pC->useRandomRowid ){ 4150 rc = sqlite3BtreeLast(pC->uc.pCursor, &res); 4151 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 4152 goto abort_due_to_error; 4153 } 4154 if( res ){ 4155 v = 1; /* IMP: R-61914-48074 */ 4156 }else{ 4157 assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pC->uc.pCursor) ); 4158 rc = sqlite3BtreeKeySize(pC->uc.pCursor, &v); 4159 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); /* Cannot fail following BtreeLast() */ 4160 if( v>=MAX_ROWID ){ 4161 pC->useRandomRowid = 1; 4162 }else{ 4163 v++; /* IMP: R-29538-34987 */ 4164 } 4165 } 4166 } 4167 4168 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT 4169 if( pOp->p3 ){ 4170 /* Assert that P3 is a valid memory cell. */ 4171 assert( pOp->p3>0 ); 4172 if( p->pFrame ){ 4173 for(pFrame=p->pFrame; pFrame->pParent; pFrame=pFrame->pParent); 4174 /* Assert that P3 is a valid memory cell. */ 4175 assert( pOp->p3<=pFrame->nMem ); 4176 pMem = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p3]; 4177 }else{ 4178 /* Assert that P3 is a valid memory cell. */ 4179 assert( pOp->p3<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 4180 pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 4181 memAboutToChange(p, pMem); 4182 } 4183 assert( memIsValid(pMem) ); 4184 4185 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pMem); 4186 sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pMem); 4187 assert( (pMem->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ); /* mem(P3) holds an integer */ 4188 if( pMem->u.i==MAX_ROWID || pC->useRandomRowid ){ 4189 rc = SQLITE_FULL; /* IMP: R-12275-61338 */ 4190 goto abort_due_to_error; 4191 } 4192 if( v<pMem->u.i+1 ){ 4193 v = pMem->u.i + 1; 4194 } 4195 pMem->u.i = v; 4196 } 4197 #endif 4198 if( pC->useRandomRowid ){ 4199 /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-07677-41881 If the largest ROWID is equal to the 4200 ** largest possible integer (9223372036854775807) then the database 4201 ** engine starts picking positive candidate ROWIDs at random until 4202 ** it finds one that is not previously used. */ 4203 assert( pOp->p3==0 ); /* We cannot be in random rowid mode if this is 4204 ** an AUTOINCREMENT table. */ 4205 cnt = 0; 4206 do{ 4207 sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(v), &v); 4208 v &= (MAX_ROWID>>1); v++; /* Ensure that v is greater than zero */ 4209 }while( ((rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pC->uc.pCursor, 0, (u64)v, 4210 0, &res))==SQLITE_OK) 4211 && (res==0) 4212 && (++cnt<100)); 4213 if( rc==SQLITE_OK && res==0 ){ 4214 rc = SQLITE_FULL; /* IMP: R-38219-53002 */ 4215 goto abort_due_to_error; 4216 } 4217 assert( v>0 ); /* EV: R-40812-03570 */ 4218 } 4219 pC->deferredMoveto = 0; 4220 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4221 } 4222 pOut->u.i = v; 4223 break; 4224 } 4225 4226 /* Opcode: Insert P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 4227 ** Synopsis: intkey=r[P3] data=r[P2] 4228 ** 4229 ** Write an entry into the table of cursor P1. A new entry is 4230 ** created if it doesn't already exist or the data for an existing 4231 ** entry is overwritten. The data is the value MEM_Blob stored in register 4232 ** number P2. The key is stored in register P3. The key must 4233 ** be a MEM_Int. 4234 ** 4235 ** If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag of P5 is set, then the row change count is 4236 ** incremented (otherwise not). If the OPFLAG_LASTROWID flag of P5 is set, 4237 ** then rowid is stored for subsequent return by the 4238 ** sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() function (otherwise it is unmodified). 4239 ** 4240 ** If the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag of P5 is set and if the result of 4241 ** the last seek operation (OP_NotExists) was a success, then this 4242 ** operation will not attempt to find the appropriate row before doing 4243 ** the insert but will instead overwrite the row that the cursor is 4244 ** currently pointing to. Presumably, the prior OP_NotExists opcode 4245 ** has already positioned the cursor correctly. This is an optimization 4246 ** that boosts performance by avoiding redundant seeks. 4247 ** 4248 ** If the OPFLAG_ISUPDATE flag is set, then this opcode is part of an 4249 ** UPDATE operation. Otherwise (if the flag is clear) then this opcode 4250 ** is part of an INSERT operation. The difference is only important to 4251 ** the update hook. 4252 ** 4253 ** Parameter P4 may point to a string containing the table-name, or 4254 ** may be NULL. If it is not NULL, then the update-hook 4255 ** (sqlite3.xUpdateCallback) is invoked following a successful insert. 4256 ** 4257 ** (WARNING/TODO: If P1 is a pseudo-cursor and P2 is dynamically 4258 ** allocated, then ownership of P2 is transferred to the pseudo-cursor 4259 ** and register P2 becomes ephemeral. If the cursor is changed, the 4260 ** value of register P2 will then change. Make sure this does not 4261 ** cause any problems.) 4262 ** 4263 ** This instruction only works on tables. The equivalent instruction 4264 ** for indices is OP_IdxInsert. 4265 */ 4266 /* Opcode: InsertInt P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 4267 ** Synopsis: intkey=P3 data=r[P2] 4268 ** 4269 ** This works exactly like OP_Insert except that the key is the 4270 ** integer value P3, not the value of the integer stored in register P3. 4271 */ 4272 case OP_Insert: 4273 case OP_InsertInt: { 4274 Mem *pData; /* MEM cell holding data for the record to be inserted */ 4275 Mem *pKey; /* MEM cell holding key for the record */ 4276 i64 iKey; /* The integer ROWID or key for the record to be inserted */ 4277 VdbeCursor *pC; /* Cursor to table into which insert is written */ 4278 int nZero; /* Number of zero-bytes to append */ 4279 int seekResult; /* Result of prior seek or 0 if no USESEEKRESULT flag */ 4280 const char *zDb; /* database name - used by the update hook */ 4281 const char *zTbl; /* Table name - used by the opdate hook */ 4282 int op; /* Opcode for update hook: SQLITE_UPDATE or SQLITE_INSERT */ 4283 4284 pData = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 4285 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4286 assert( memIsValid(pData) ); 4287 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4288 assert( pC!=0 ); 4289 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4290 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 4291 assert( pC->isTable ); 4292 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, pData); 4293 4294 if( pOp->opcode==OP_Insert ){ 4295 pKey = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 4296 assert( pKey->flags & MEM_Int ); 4297 assert( memIsValid(pKey) ); 4298 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pKey); 4299 iKey = pKey->u.i; 4300 }else{ 4301 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_InsertInt ); 4302 iKey = pOp->p3; 4303 } 4304 4305 if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ) p->nChange++; 4306 if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_LASTROWID ) db->lastRowid = lastRowid = iKey; 4307 if( pData->flags & MEM_Null ){ 4308 pData->z = 0; 4309 pData->n = 0; 4310 }else{ 4311 assert( pData->flags & (MEM_Blob|MEM_Str) ); 4312 } 4313 seekResult = ((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT) ? pC->seekResult : 0); 4314 if( pData->flags & MEM_Zero ){ 4315 nZero = pData->u.nZero; 4316 }else{ 4317 nZero = 0; 4318 } 4319 rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, 0, iKey, 4320 pData->z, pData->n, nZero, 4321 (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_APPEND)!=0, seekResult 4322 ); 4323 pC->deferredMoveto = 0; 4324 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4325 4326 /* Invoke the update-hook if required. */ 4327 if( rc==SQLITE_OK && db->xUpdateCallback && pOp->p4.z ){ 4328 zDb = db->aDb[pC->iDb].zName; 4329 zTbl = pOp->p4.z; 4330 op = ((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_INSERT); 4331 assert( pC->isTable ); 4332 db->xUpdateCallback(db->pUpdateArg, op, zDb, zTbl, iKey); 4333 assert( pC->iDb>=0 ); 4334 } 4335 break; 4336 } 4337 4338 /* Opcode: Delete P1 P2 * P4 P5 4339 ** 4340 ** Delete the record at which the P1 cursor is currently pointing. 4341 ** 4342 ** If the P5 parameter is non-zero, the cursor will be left pointing at 4343 ** either the next or the previous record in the table. If it is left 4344 ** pointing at the next record, then the next Next instruction will be a 4345 ** no-op. As a result, in this case it is OK to delete a record from within a 4346 ** Next loop. If P5 is zero, then the cursor is left in an undefined state. 4347 ** 4348 ** If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag of P2 is set, then the row change count is 4349 ** incremented (otherwise not). 4350 ** 4351 ** P1 must not be pseudo-table. It has to be a real table with 4352 ** multiple rows. 4353 ** 4354 ** If P4 is not NULL, then it is the name of the table that P1 is 4355 ** pointing to. The update hook will be invoked, if it exists. 4356 ** If P4 is not NULL then the P1 cursor must have been positioned 4357 ** using OP_NotFound prior to invoking this opcode. 4358 */ 4359 case OP_Delete: { 4360 VdbeCursor *pC; 4361 u8 hasUpdateCallback; 4362 4363 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4364 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4365 assert( pC!=0 ); 4366 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4367 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 4368 assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); 4369 4370 hasUpdateCallback = db->xUpdateCallback && pOp->p4.z && pC->isTable; 4371 if( pOp->p5 && hasUpdateCallback ){ 4372 sqlite3BtreeKeySize(pC->uc.pCursor, &pC->movetoTarget); 4373 } 4374 4375 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 4376 /* The seek operation that positioned the cursor prior to OP_Delete will 4377 ** have also set the pC->movetoTarget field to the rowid of the row that 4378 ** is being deleted */ 4379 if( pOp->p4.z && pC->isTable && pOp->p5==0 ){ 4380 i64 iKey = 0; 4381 sqlite3BtreeKeySize(pC->uc.pCursor, &iKey); 4382 assert( pC->movetoTarget==iKey ); 4383 } 4384 #endif 4385 4386 rc = sqlite3BtreeDelete(pC->uc.pCursor, pOp->p5); 4387 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4388 4389 /* Invoke the update-hook if required. */ 4390 if( rc==SQLITE_OK && hasUpdateCallback ){ 4391 db->xUpdateCallback(db->pUpdateArg, SQLITE_DELETE, 4392 db->aDb[pC->iDb].zName, pOp->p4.z, pC->movetoTarget); 4393 assert( pC->iDb>=0 ); 4394 } 4395 if( pOp->p2 & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ) p->nChange++; 4396 break; 4397 } 4398 /* Opcode: ResetCount * * * * * 4399 ** 4400 ** The value of the change counter is copied to the database handle 4401 ** change counter (returned by subsequent calls to sqlite3_changes()). 4402 ** Then the VMs internal change counter resets to 0. 4403 ** This is used by trigger programs. 4404 */ 4405 case OP_ResetCount: { 4406 sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange); 4407 p->nChange = 0; 4408 break; 4409 } 4410 4411 /* Opcode: SorterCompare P1 P2 P3 P4 4412 ** Synopsis: if key(P1)!=trim(r[P3],P4) goto P2 4413 ** 4414 ** P1 is a sorter cursor. This instruction compares a prefix of the 4415 ** record blob in register P3 against a prefix of the entry that 4416 ** the sorter cursor currently points to. Only the first P4 fields 4417 ** of r[P3] and the sorter record are compared. 4418 ** 4419 ** If either P3 or the sorter contains a NULL in one of their significant 4420 ** fields (not counting the P4 fields at the end which are ignored) then 4421 ** the comparison is assumed to be equal. 4422 ** 4423 ** Fall through to next instruction if the two records compare equal to 4424 ** each other. Jump to P2 if they are different. 4425 */ 4426 case OP_SorterCompare: { 4427 VdbeCursor *pC; 4428 int res; 4429 int nKeyCol; 4430 4431 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4432 assert( isSorter(pC) ); 4433 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); 4434 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 4435 nKeyCol = pOp->p4.i; 4436 res = 0; 4437 rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterCompare(pC, pIn3, nKeyCol, &res); 4438 VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); 4439 if( res ) goto jump_to_p2; 4440 break; 4441 }; 4442 4443 /* Opcode: SorterData P1 P2 P3 * * 4444 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=data 4445 ** 4446 ** Write into register P2 the current sorter data for sorter cursor P1. 4447 ** Then clear the column header cache on cursor P3. 4448 ** 4449 ** This opcode is normally use to move a record out of the sorter and into 4450 ** a register that is the source for a pseudo-table cursor created using 4451 ** OpenPseudo. That pseudo-table cursor is the one that is identified by 4452 ** parameter P3. Clearing the P3 column cache as part of this opcode saves 4453 ** us from having to issue a separate NullRow instruction to clear that cache. 4454 */ 4455 case OP_SorterData: { 4456 VdbeCursor *pC; 4457 4458 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 4459 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4460 assert( isSorter(pC) ); 4461 rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterRowkey(pC, pOut); 4462 assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || (pOut->flags & MEM_Blob) ); 4463 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4464 p->apCsr[pOp->p3]->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4465 break; 4466 } 4467 4468 /* Opcode: RowData P1 P2 * * * 4469 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=data 4470 ** 4471 ** Write into register P2 the complete row data for cursor P1. 4472 ** There is no interpretation of the data. 4473 ** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as 4474 ** it is found in the database file. 4475 ** 4476 ** If the P1 cursor must be pointing to a valid row (not a NULL row) 4477 ** of a real table, not a pseudo-table. 4478 */ 4479 /* Opcode: RowKey P1 P2 * * * 4480 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=key 4481 ** 4482 ** Write into register P2 the complete row key for cursor P1. 4483 ** There is no interpretation of the data. 4484 ** The key is copied onto the P2 register exactly as 4485 ** it is found in the database file. 4486 ** 4487 ** If the P1 cursor must be pointing to a valid row (not a NULL row) 4488 ** of a real table, not a pseudo-table. 4489 */ 4490 case OP_RowKey: 4491 case OP_RowData: { 4492 VdbeCursor *pC; 4493 BtCursor *pCrsr; 4494 u32 n; 4495 i64 n64; 4496 4497 pOut = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 4498 memAboutToChange(p, pOut); 4499 4500 /* Note that RowKey and RowData are really exactly the same instruction */ 4501 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4502 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4503 assert( pC!=0 ); 4504 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4505 assert( isSorter(pC)==0 ); 4506 assert( pC->isTable || pOp->opcode!=OP_RowData ); 4507 assert( pC->isTable==0 || pOp->opcode==OP_RowData ); 4508 assert( pC->nullRow==0 ); 4509 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 4510 pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; 4511 4512 /* The OP_RowKey and OP_RowData opcodes always follow OP_NotExists or 4513 ** OP_Rewind/Op_Next with no intervening instructions that might invalidate 4514 ** the cursor. If this where not the case, on of the following assert()s 4515 ** would fail. Should this ever change (because of changes in the code 4516 ** generator) then the fix would be to insert a call to 4517 ** sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto(). 4518 */ 4519 assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); 4520 assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCrsr) ); 4521 #if 0 /* Not required due to the previous to assert() statements */ 4522 rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto(pC); 4523 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error; 4524 #endif 4525 4526 if( pC->isTable==0 ){ 4527 assert( !pC->isTable ); 4528 VVA_ONLY(rc =) sqlite3BtreeKeySize(pCrsr, &n64); 4529 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); /* True because of CursorMoveto() call above */ 4530 if( n64>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){ 4531 goto too_big; 4532 } 4533 n = (u32)n64; 4534 }else{ 4535 VVA_ONLY(rc =) sqlite3BtreeDataSize(pCrsr, &n); 4536 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); /* DataSize() cannot fail */ 4537 if( n>(u32)db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH] ){ 4538 goto too_big; 4539 } 4540 } 4541 testcase( n==0 ); 4542 if( sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize(pOut, MAX(n,32)) ){ 4543 goto no_mem; 4544 } 4545 pOut->n = n; 4546 MemSetTypeFlag(pOut, MEM_Blob); 4547 if( pC->isTable==0 ){ 4548 rc = sqlite3BtreeKey(pCrsr, 0, n, pOut->z); 4549 }else{ 4550 rc = sqlite3BtreeData(pCrsr, 0, n, pOut->z); 4551 } 4552 pOut->enc = SQLITE_UTF8; /* In case the blob is ever cast to text */ 4553 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pOut); 4554 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2, pOut); 4555 break; 4556 } 4557 4558 /* Opcode: Rowid P1 P2 * * * 4559 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=rowid 4560 ** 4561 ** Store in register P2 an integer which is the key of the table entry that 4562 ** P1 is currently point to. 4563 ** 4564 ** P1 can be either an ordinary table or a virtual table. There used to 4565 ** be a separate OP_VRowid opcode for use with virtual tables, but this 4566 ** one opcode now works for both table types. 4567 */ 4568 case OP_Rowid: { /* out2 */ 4569 VdbeCursor *pC; 4570 i64 v; 4571 sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; 4572 const sqlite3_module *pModule; 4573 4574 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 4575 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4576 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4577 assert( pC!=0 ); 4578 assert( pC->eCurType!=CURTYPE_PSEUDO || pC->nullRow ); 4579 if( pC->nullRow ){ 4580 pOut->flags = MEM_Null; 4581 break; 4582 }else if( pC->deferredMoveto ){ 4583 v = pC->movetoTarget; 4584 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 4585 }else if( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_VTAB ){ 4586 assert( pC->uc.pVCur!=0 ); 4587 pVtab = pC->uc.pVCur->pVtab; 4588 pModule = pVtab->pModule; 4589 assert( pModule->xRowid ); 4590 rc = pModule->xRowid(pC->uc.pVCur, &v); 4591 sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); 4592 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 4593 }else{ 4594 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4595 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 4596 rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorRestore(pC); 4597 if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error; 4598 if( pC->nullRow ){ 4599 pOut->flags = MEM_Null; 4600 break; 4601 } 4602 rc = sqlite3BtreeKeySize(pC->uc.pCursor, &v); 4603 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); /* Always so because of CursorRestore() above */ 4604 } 4605 pOut->u.i = v; 4606 break; 4607 } 4608 4609 /* Opcode: NullRow P1 * * * * 4610 ** 4611 ** Move the cursor P1 to a null row. Any OP_Column operations 4612 ** that occur while the cursor is on the null row will always 4613 ** write a NULL. 4614 */ 4615 case OP_NullRow: { 4616 VdbeCursor *pC; 4617 4618 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4619 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4620 assert( pC!=0 ); 4621 pC->nullRow = 1; 4622 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4623 if( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ){ 4624 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0 ); 4625 sqlite3BtreeClearCursor(pC->uc.pCursor); 4626 } 4627 break; 4628 } 4629 4630 /* Opcode: Last P1 P2 P3 * * 4631 ** 4632 ** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Prev instruction for P1 4633 ** will refer to the last entry in the database table or index. 4634 ** If the table or index is empty and P2>0, then jump immediately to P2. 4635 ** If P2 is 0 or if the table or index is not empty, fall through 4636 ** to the following instruction. 4637 ** 4638 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order, 4639 ** from the end toward the beginning. In other words, the cursor is 4640 ** configured to use Prev, not Next. 4641 */ 4642 case OP_Last: { /* jump */ 4643 VdbeCursor *pC; 4644 BtCursor *pCrsr; 4645 int res; 4646 4647 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4648 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4649 assert( pC!=0 ); 4650 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4651 pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; 4652 res = 0; 4653 assert( pCrsr!=0 ); 4654 rc = sqlite3BtreeLast(pCrsr, &res); 4655 pC->nullRow = (u8)res; 4656 pC->deferredMoveto = 0; 4657 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4658 pC->seekResult = pOp->p3; 4659 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 4660 pC->seekOp = OP_Last; 4661 #endif 4662 if( pOp->p2>0 ){ 4663 VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); 4664 if( res ) goto jump_to_p2; 4665 } 4666 break; 4667 } 4668 4669 4670 /* Opcode: Sort P1 P2 * * * 4671 ** 4672 ** This opcode does exactly the same thing as OP_Rewind except that 4673 ** it increments an undocumented global variable used for testing. 4674 ** 4675 ** Sorting is accomplished by writing records into a sorting index, 4676 ** then rewinding that index and playing it back from beginning to 4677 ** end. We use the OP_Sort opcode instead of OP_Rewind to do the 4678 ** rewinding so that the global variable will be incremented and 4679 ** regression tests can determine whether or not the optimizer is 4680 ** correctly optimizing out sorts. 4681 */ 4682 case OP_SorterSort: /* jump */ 4683 case OP_Sort: { /* jump */ 4684 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 4685 sqlite3_sort_count++; 4686 sqlite3_search_count--; 4687 #endif 4688 p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT]++; 4689 /* Fall through into OP_Rewind */ 4690 } 4691 /* Opcode: Rewind P1 P2 * * * 4692 ** 4693 ** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1 4694 ** will refer to the first entry in the database table or index. 4695 ** If the table or index is empty, jump immediately to P2. 4696 ** If the table or index is not empty, fall through to the following 4697 ** instruction. 4698 ** 4699 ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order, 4700 ** from the beginning toward the end. In other words, the cursor is 4701 ** configured to use Next, not Prev. 4702 */ 4703 case OP_Rewind: { /* jump */ 4704 VdbeCursor *pC; 4705 BtCursor *pCrsr; 4706 int res; 4707 4708 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4709 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4710 assert( pC!=0 ); 4711 assert( isSorter(pC)==(pOp->opcode==OP_SorterSort) ); 4712 res = 1; 4713 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 4714 pC->seekOp = OP_Rewind; 4715 #endif 4716 if( isSorter(pC) ){ 4717 rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterRewind(pC, &res); 4718 }else{ 4719 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4720 pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; 4721 assert( pCrsr ); 4722 rc = sqlite3BtreeFirst(pCrsr, &res); 4723 pC->deferredMoveto = 0; 4724 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4725 } 4726 pC->nullRow = (u8)res; 4727 assert( pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2<p->nOp ); 4728 VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); 4729 if( res ) goto jump_to_p2; 4730 break; 4731 } 4732 4733 /* Opcode: Next P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 4734 ** 4735 ** Advance cursor P1 so that it points to the next key/data pair in its 4736 ** table or index. If there are no more key/value pairs then fall through 4737 ** to the following instruction. But if the cursor advance was successful, 4738 ** jump immediately to P2. 4739 ** 4740 ** The Next opcode is only valid following an SeekGT, SeekGE, or 4741 ** OP_Rewind opcode used to position the cursor. Next is not allowed 4742 ** to follow SeekLT, SeekLE, or OP_Last. 4743 ** 4744 ** The P1 cursor must be for a real table, not a pseudo-table. P1 must have 4745 ** been opened prior to this opcode or the program will segfault. 4746 ** 4747 ** The P3 value is a hint to the btree implementation. If P3==1, that 4748 ** means P1 is an SQL index and that this instruction could have been 4749 ** omitted if that index had been unique. P3 is usually 0. P3 is 4750 ** always either 0 or 1. 4751 ** 4752 ** P4 is always of type P4_ADVANCE. The function pointer points to 4753 ** sqlite3BtreeNext(). 4754 ** 4755 ** If P5 is positive and the jump is taken, then event counter 4756 ** number P5-1 in the prepared statement is incremented. 4757 ** 4758 ** See also: Prev, NextIfOpen 4759 */ 4760 /* Opcode: NextIfOpen P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 4761 ** 4762 ** This opcode works just like Next except that if cursor P1 is not 4763 ** open it behaves a no-op. 4764 */ 4765 /* Opcode: Prev P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 4766 ** 4767 ** Back up cursor P1 so that it points to the previous key/data pair in its 4768 ** table or index. If there is no previous key/value pairs then fall through 4769 ** to the following instruction. But if the cursor backup was successful, 4770 ** jump immediately to P2. 4771 ** 4772 ** 4773 ** The Prev opcode is only valid following an SeekLT, SeekLE, or 4774 ** OP_Last opcode used to position the cursor. Prev is not allowed 4775 ** to follow SeekGT, SeekGE, or OP_Rewind. 4776 ** 4777 ** The P1 cursor must be for a real table, not a pseudo-table. If P1 is 4778 ** not open then the behavior is undefined. 4779 ** 4780 ** The P3 value is a hint to the btree implementation. If P3==1, that 4781 ** means P1 is an SQL index and that this instruction could have been 4782 ** omitted if that index had been unique. P3 is usually 0. P3 is 4783 ** always either 0 or 1. 4784 ** 4785 ** P4 is always of type P4_ADVANCE. The function pointer points to 4786 ** sqlite3BtreePrevious(). 4787 ** 4788 ** If P5 is positive and the jump is taken, then event counter 4789 ** number P5-1 in the prepared statement is incremented. 4790 */ 4791 /* Opcode: PrevIfOpen P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 4792 ** 4793 ** This opcode works just like Prev except that if cursor P1 is not 4794 ** open it behaves a no-op. 4795 */ 4796 case OP_SorterNext: { /* jump */ 4797 VdbeCursor *pC; 4798 int res; 4799 4800 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4801 assert( isSorter(pC) ); 4802 res = 0; 4803 rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterNext(db, pC, &res); 4804 goto next_tail; 4805 case OP_PrevIfOpen: /* jump */ 4806 case OP_NextIfOpen: /* jump */ 4807 if( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]==0 ) break; 4808 /* Fall through */ 4809 case OP_Prev: /* jump */ 4810 case OP_Next: /* jump */ 4811 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4812 assert( pOp->p5<ArraySize(p->aCounter) ); 4813 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4814 res = pOp->p3; 4815 assert( pC!=0 ); 4816 assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); 4817 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4818 assert( res==0 || (res==1 && pC->isTable==0) ); 4819 testcase( res==1 ); 4820 assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_Next || pOp->p4.xAdvance==sqlite3BtreeNext ); 4821 assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_Prev || pOp->p4.xAdvance==sqlite3BtreePrevious ); 4822 assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_NextIfOpen || pOp->p4.xAdvance==sqlite3BtreeNext ); 4823 assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_PrevIfOpen || pOp->p4.xAdvance==sqlite3BtreePrevious); 4824 4825 /* The Next opcode is only used after SeekGT, SeekGE, and Rewind. 4826 ** The Prev opcode is only used after SeekLT, SeekLE, and Last. */ 4827 assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_Next || pOp->opcode!=OP_NextIfOpen 4828 || pC->seekOp==OP_SeekGT || pC->seekOp==OP_SeekGE 4829 || pC->seekOp==OP_Rewind || pC->seekOp==OP_Found); 4830 assert( pOp->opcode!=OP_Prev || pOp->opcode!=OP_PrevIfOpen 4831 || pC->seekOp==OP_SeekLT || pC->seekOp==OP_SeekLE 4832 || pC->seekOp==OP_Last ); 4833 4834 rc = pOp->p4.xAdvance(pC->uc.pCursor, &res); 4835 next_tail: 4836 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4837 VdbeBranchTaken(res==0,2); 4838 if( res==0 ){ 4839 pC->nullRow = 0; 4840 p->aCounter[pOp->p5]++; 4841 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST 4842 sqlite3_search_count++; 4843 #endif 4844 goto jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt; 4845 }else{ 4846 pC->nullRow = 1; 4847 } 4848 goto check_for_interrupt; 4849 } 4850 4851 /* Opcode: IdxInsert P1 P2 P3 * P5 4852 ** Synopsis: key=r[P2] 4853 ** 4854 ** Register P2 holds an SQL index key made using the 4855 ** MakeRecord instructions. This opcode writes that key 4856 ** into the index P1. Data for the entry is nil. 4857 ** 4858 ** P3 is a flag that provides a hint to the b-tree layer that this 4859 ** insert is likely to be an append. 4860 ** 4861 ** If P5 has the OPFLAG_NCHANGE bit set, then the change counter is 4862 ** incremented by this instruction. If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE bit is clear, 4863 ** then the change counter is unchanged. 4864 ** 4865 ** If P5 has the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT bit set, then the cursor must have 4866 ** just done a seek to the spot where the new entry is to be inserted. 4867 ** This flag avoids doing an extra seek. 4868 ** 4869 ** This instruction only works for indices. The equivalent instruction 4870 ** for tables is OP_Insert. 4871 */ 4872 case OP_SorterInsert: /* in2 */ 4873 case OP_IdxInsert: { /* in2 */ 4874 VdbeCursor *pC; 4875 int nKey; 4876 const char *zKey; 4877 4878 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4879 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4880 assert( pC!=0 ); 4881 assert( isSorter(pC)==(pOp->opcode==OP_SorterInsert) ); 4882 pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 4883 assert( pIn2->flags & MEM_Blob ); 4884 if( pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ) p->nChange++; 4885 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE || pOp->opcode==OP_SorterInsert ); 4886 assert( pC->isTable==0 ); 4887 rc = ExpandBlob(pIn2); 4888 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 4889 if( pOp->opcode==OP_SorterInsert ){ 4890 rc = sqlite3VdbeSorterWrite(pC, pIn2); 4891 }else{ 4892 nKey = pIn2->n; 4893 zKey = pIn2->z; 4894 rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, zKey, nKey, "", 0, 0, pOp->p3, 4895 ((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT) ? pC->seekResult : 0) 4896 ); 4897 assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); 4898 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4899 } 4900 } 4901 break; 4902 } 4903 4904 /* Opcode: IdxDelete P1 P2 P3 * * 4905 ** Synopsis: key=r[P2@P3] 4906 ** 4907 ** The content of P3 registers starting at register P2 form 4908 ** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the 4909 ** index opened by cursor P1. 4910 */ 4911 case OP_IdxDelete: { 4912 VdbeCursor *pC; 4913 BtCursor *pCrsr; 4914 int res; 4915 UnpackedRecord r; 4916 4917 assert( pOp->p3>0 ); 4918 assert( pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2+pOp->p3<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor)+1 ); 4919 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4920 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4921 assert( pC!=0 ); 4922 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4923 pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; 4924 assert( pCrsr!=0 ); 4925 assert( pOp->p5==0 ); 4926 r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo; 4927 r.nField = (u16)pOp->p3; 4928 r.default_rc = 0; 4929 r.aMem = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 4930 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 4931 { int i; for(i=0; i<r.nField; i++) assert( memIsValid(&r.aMem[i]) ); } 4932 #endif 4933 rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pCrsr, &r, 0, 0, &res); 4934 if( rc==SQLITE_OK && res==0 ){ 4935 rc = sqlite3BtreeDelete(pCrsr, 0); 4936 } 4937 assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); 4938 pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; 4939 break; 4940 } 4941 4942 /* Opcode: IdxRowid P1 P2 * * * 4943 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=rowid 4944 ** 4945 ** Write into register P2 an integer which is the last entry in the record at 4946 ** the end of the index key pointed to by cursor P1. This integer should be 4947 ** the rowid of the table entry to which this index entry points. 4948 ** 4949 ** See also: Rowid, MakeRecord. 4950 */ 4951 case OP_IdxRowid: { /* out2 */ 4952 BtCursor *pCrsr; 4953 VdbeCursor *pC; 4954 i64 rowid; 4955 4956 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 4957 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 4958 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 4959 assert( pC!=0 ); 4960 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 4961 pCrsr = pC->uc.pCursor; 4962 assert( pCrsr!=0 ); 4963 pOut->flags = MEM_Null; 4964 assert( pC->isTable==0 ); 4965 assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); 4966 4967 /* sqlite3VbeCursorRestore() can only fail if the record has been deleted 4968 ** out from under the cursor. That will never happend for an IdxRowid 4969 ** opcode, hence the NEVER() arround the check of the return value. 4970 */ 4971 rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorRestore(pC); 4972 if( NEVER(rc!=SQLITE_OK) ) goto abort_due_to_error; 4973 4974 if( !pC->nullRow ){ 4975 rowid = 0; /* Not needed. Only used to silence a warning. */ 4976 rc = sqlite3VdbeIdxRowid(db, pCrsr, &rowid); 4977 if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ 4978 goto abort_due_to_error; 4979 } 4980 pOut->u.i = rowid; 4981 pOut->flags = MEM_Int; 4982 } 4983 break; 4984 } 4985 4986 /* Opcode: IdxGE P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 4987 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 4988 ** 4989 ** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index 4990 ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index 4991 ** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID 4992 ** fields at the end. 4993 ** 4994 ** If the P1 index entry is greater than or equal to the key value 4995 ** then jump to P2. Otherwise fall through to the next instruction. 4996 */ 4997 /* Opcode: IdxGT P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 4998 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 4999 ** 5000 ** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index 5001 ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index 5002 ** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID 5003 ** fields at the end. 5004 ** 5005 ** If the P1 index entry is greater than the key value 5006 ** then jump to P2. Otherwise fall through to the next instruction. 5007 */ 5008 /* Opcode: IdxLT P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 5009 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 5010 ** 5011 ** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index 5012 ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID. Compare this key value against 5013 ** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or 5014 ** ROWID on the P1 index. 5015 ** 5016 ** If the P1 index entry is less than the key value then jump to P2. 5017 ** Otherwise fall through to the next instruction. 5018 */ 5019 /* Opcode: IdxLE P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 5020 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] 5021 ** 5022 ** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index 5023 ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID. Compare this key value against 5024 ** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or 5025 ** ROWID on the P1 index. 5026 ** 5027 ** If the P1 index entry is less than or equal to the key value then jump 5028 ** to P2. Otherwise fall through to the next instruction. 5029 */ 5030 case OP_IdxLE: /* jump */ 5031 case OP_IdxGT: /* jump */ 5032 case OP_IdxLT: /* jump */ 5033 case OP_IdxGE: { /* jump */ 5034 VdbeCursor *pC; 5035 int res; 5036 UnpackedRecord r; 5037 5038 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 5039 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 5040 assert( pC!=0 ); 5041 assert( pC->isOrdered ); 5042 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 5043 assert( pC->uc.pCursor!=0); 5044 assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); 5045 assert( pOp->p5==0 || pOp->p5==1 ); 5046 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); 5047 r.pKeyInfo = pC->pKeyInfo; 5048 r.nField = (u16)pOp->p4.i; 5049 if( pOp->opcode<OP_IdxLT ){ 5050 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLE || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGT ); 5051 r.default_rc = -1; 5052 }else{ 5053 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGE || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLT ); 5054 r.default_rc = 0; 5055 } 5056 r.aMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 5057 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 5058 { int i; for(i=0; i<r.nField; i++) assert( memIsValid(&r.aMem[i]) ); } 5059 #endif 5060 res = 0; /* Not needed. Only used to silence a warning. */ 5061 rc = sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare(db, pC, &r, &res); 5062 assert( (OP_IdxLE&1)==(OP_IdxLT&1) && (OP_IdxGE&1)==(OP_IdxGT&1) ); 5063 if( (pOp->opcode&1)==(OP_IdxLT&1) ){ 5064 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLE || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLT ); 5065 res = -res; 5066 }else{ 5067 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGE || pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGT ); 5068 res++; 5069 } 5070 VdbeBranchTaken(res>0,2); 5071 if( res>0 ) goto jump_to_p2; 5072 break; 5073 } 5074 5075 /* Opcode: Destroy P1 P2 P3 * * 5076 ** 5077 ** Delete an entire database table or index whose root page in the database 5078 ** file is given by P1. 5079 ** 5080 ** The table being destroyed is in the main database file if P3==0. If 5081 ** P3==1 then the table to be clear is in the auxiliary database file 5082 ** that is used to store tables create using CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE. 5083 ** 5084 ** If AUTOVACUUM is enabled then it is possible that another root page 5085 ** might be moved into the newly deleted root page in order to keep all 5086 ** root pages contiguous at the beginning of the database. The former 5087 ** value of the root page that moved - its value before the move occurred - 5088 ** is stored in register P2. If no page 5089 ** movement was required (because the table being dropped was already 5090 ** the last one in the database) then a zero is stored in register P2. 5091 ** If AUTOVACUUM is disabled then a zero is stored in register P2. 5092 ** 5093 ** See also: Clear 5094 */ 5095 case OP_Destroy: { /* out2 */ 5096 int iMoved; 5097 int iDb; 5098 5099 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 5100 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 5101 pOut->flags = MEM_Null; 5102 if( db->nVdbeRead > db->nVDestroy+1 ){ 5103 rc = SQLITE_LOCKED; 5104 p->errorAction = OE_Abort; 5105 }else{ 5106 iDb = pOp->p3; 5107 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, iDb) ); 5108 iMoved = 0; /* Not needed. Only to silence a warning. */ 5109 rc = sqlite3BtreeDropTable(db->aDb[iDb].pBt, pOp->p1, &iMoved); 5110 pOut->flags = MEM_Int; 5111 pOut->u.i = iMoved; 5112 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM 5113 if( rc==SQLITE_OK && iMoved!=0 ){ 5114 sqlite3RootPageMoved(db, iDb, iMoved, pOp->p1); 5115 /* All OP_Destroy operations occur on the same btree */ 5116 assert( resetSchemaOnFault==0 || resetSchemaOnFault==iDb+1 ); 5117 resetSchemaOnFault = iDb+1; 5118 } 5119 #endif 5120 } 5121 break; 5122 } 5123 5124 /* Opcode: Clear P1 P2 P3 5125 ** 5126 ** Delete all contents of the database table or index whose root page 5127 ** in the database file is given by P1. But, unlike Destroy, do not 5128 ** remove the table or index from the database file. 5129 ** 5130 ** The table being clear is in the main database file if P2==0. If 5131 ** P2==1 then the table to be clear is in the auxiliary database file 5132 ** that is used to store tables create using CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE. 5133 ** 5134 ** If the P3 value is non-zero, then the table referred to must be an 5135 ** intkey table (an SQL table, not an index). In this case the row change 5136 ** count is incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared. 5137 ** If P3 is greater than zero, then the value stored in register P3 is 5138 ** also incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared. 5139 ** 5140 ** See also: Destroy 5141 */ 5142 case OP_Clear: { 5143 int nChange; 5144 5145 nChange = 0; 5146 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 5147 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p2) ); 5148 rc = sqlite3BtreeClearTable( 5149 db->aDb[pOp->p2].pBt, pOp->p1, (pOp->p3 ? &nChange : 0) 5150 ); 5151 if( pOp->p3 ){ 5152 p->nChange += nChange; 5153 if( pOp->p3>0 ){ 5154 assert( memIsValid(&aMem[pOp->p3]) ); 5155 memAboutToChange(p, &aMem[pOp->p3]); 5156 aMem[pOp->p3].u.i += nChange; 5157 } 5158 } 5159 break; 5160 } 5161 5162 /* Opcode: ResetSorter P1 * * * * 5163 ** 5164 ** Delete all contents from the ephemeral table or sorter 5165 ** that is open on cursor P1. 5166 ** 5167 ** This opcode only works for cursors used for sorting and 5168 ** opened with OP_OpenEphemeral or OP_SorterOpen. 5169 */ 5170 case OP_ResetSorter: { 5171 VdbeCursor *pC; 5172 5173 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 5174 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 5175 assert( pC!=0 ); 5176 if( isSorter(pC) ){ 5177 sqlite3VdbeSorterReset(db, pC->uc.pSorter); 5178 }else{ 5179 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 5180 assert( pC->isEphemeral ); 5181 rc = sqlite3BtreeClearTableOfCursor(pC->uc.pCursor); 5182 } 5183 break; 5184 } 5185 5186 /* Opcode: CreateTable P1 P2 * * * 5187 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=root iDb=P1 5188 ** 5189 ** Allocate a new table in the main database file if P1==0 or in the 5190 ** auxiliary database file if P1==1 or in an attached database if 5191 ** P1>1. Write the root page number of the new table into 5192 ** register P2 5193 ** 5194 ** The difference between a table and an index is this: A table must 5195 ** have a 4-byte integer key and can have arbitrary data. An index 5196 ** has an arbitrary key but no data. 5197 ** 5198 ** See also: CreateIndex 5199 */ 5200 /* Opcode: CreateIndex P1 P2 * * * 5201 ** Synopsis: r[P2]=root iDb=P1 5202 ** 5203 ** Allocate a new index in the main database file if P1==0 or in the 5204 ** auxiliary database file if P1==1 or in an attached database if 5205 ** P1>1. Write the root page number of the new table into 5206 ** register P2. 5207 ** 5208 ** See documentation on OP_CreateTable for additional information. 5209 */ 5210 case OP_CreateIndex: /* out2 */ 5211 case OP_CreateTable: { /* out2 */ 5212 int pgno; 5213 int flags; 5214 Db *pDb; 5215 5216 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 5217 pgno = 0; 5218 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); 5219 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p1) ); 5220 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 5221 pDb = &db->aDb[pOp->p1]; 5222 assert( pDb->pBt!=0 ); 5223 if( pOp->opcode==OP_CreateTable ){ 5224 /* flags = BTREE_INTKEY; */ 5225 flags = BTREE_INTKEY; 5226 }else{ 5227 flags = BTREE_BLOBKEY; 5228 } 5229 rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pDb->pBt, &pgno, flags); 5230 pOut->u.i = pgno; 5231 break; 5232 } 5233 5234 /* Opcode: ParseSchema P1 * * P4 * 5235 ** 5236 ** Read and parse all entries from the SQLITE_MASTER table of database P1 5237 ** that match the WHERE clause P4. 5238 ** 5239 ** This opcode invokes the parser to create a new virtual machine, 5240 ** then runs the new virtual machine. It is thus a re-entrant opcode. 5241 */ 5242 case OP_ParseSchema: { 5243 int iDb; 5244 const char *zMaster; 5245 char *zSql; 5246 InitData initData; 5247 5248 /* Any prepared statement that invokes this opcode will hold mutexes 5249 ** on every btree. This is a prerequisite for invoking 5250 ** sqlite3InitCallback(). 5251 */ 5252 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 5253 for(iDb=0; iDb<db->nDb; iDb++){ 5254 assert( iDb==1 || sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(db->aDb[iDb].pBt) ); 5255 } 5256 #endif 5257 5258 iDb = pOp->p1; 5259 assert( iDb>=0 && iDb<db->nDb ); 5260 assert( DbHasProperty(db, iDb, DB_SchemaLoaded) ); 5261 /* Used to be a conditional */ { 5262 zMaster = SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb); 5263 initData.db = db; 5264 initData.iDb = pOp->p1; 5265 initData.pzErrMsg = &p->zErrMsg; 5266 zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db, 5267 "SELECT name, rootpage, sql FROM '%q'.%s WHERE %s ORDER BY rowid", 5268 db->aDb[iDb].zName, zMaster, pOp->p4.z); 5269 if( zSql==0 ){ 5270 rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; 5271 }else{ 5272 assert( db->init.busy==0 ); 5273 db->init.busy = 1; 5274 initData.rc = SQLITE_OK; 5275 assert( !db->mallocFailed ); 5276 rc = sqlite3_exec(db, zSql, sqlite3InitCallback, &initData, 0); 5277 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ) rc = initData.rc; 5278 sqlite3DbFree(db, zSql); 5279 db->init.busy = 0; 5280 } 5281 } 5282 if( rc ) sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db); 5283 if( rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ){ 5284 goto no_mem; 5285 } 5286 break; 5287 } 5288 5289 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) 5290 /* Opcode: LoadAnalysis P1 * * * * 5291 ** 5292 ** Read the sqlite_stat1 table for database P1 and load the content 5293 ** of that table into the internal index hash table. This will cause 5294 ** the analysis to be used when preparing all subsequent queries. 5295 */ 5296 case OP_LoadAnalysis: { 5297 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); 5298 rc = sqlite3AnalysisLoad(db, pOp->p1); 5299 break; 5300 } 5301 #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) */ 5302 5303 /* Opcode: DropTable P1 * * P4 * 5304 ** 5305 ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe 5306 ** the table named P4 in database P1. This is called after a table 5307 ** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep 5308 ** the internal representation of the 5309 ** schema consistent with what is on disk. 5310 */ 5311 case OP_DropTable: { 5312 sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteTable(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z); 5313 break; 5314 } 5315 5316 /* Opcode: DropIndex P1 * * P4 * 5317 ** 5318 ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe 5319 ** the index named P4 in database P1. This is called after an index 5320 ** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) 5321 ** in order to keep the internal representation of the 5322 ** schema consistent with what is on disk. 5323 */ 5324 case OP_DropIndex: { 5325 sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteIndex(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z); 5326 break; 5327 } 5328 5329 /* Opcode: DropTrigger P1 * * P4 * 5330 ** 5331 ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe 5332 ** the trigger named P4 in database P1. This is called after a trigger 5333 ** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep 5334 ** the internal representation of the 5335 ** schema consistent with what is on disk. 5336 */ 5337 case OP_DropTrigger: { 5338 sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteTrigger(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z); 5339 break; 5340 } 5341 5342 5343 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK 5344 /* Opcode: IntegrityCk P1 P2 P3 * P5 5345 ** 5346 ** Do an analysis of the currently open database. Store in 5347 ** register P1 the text of an error message describing any problems. 5348 ** If no problems are found, store a NULL in register P1. 5349 ** 5350 ** The register P3 contains the maximum number of allowed errors. 5351 ** At most reg(P3) errors will be reported. 5352 ** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are 5353 ** seen. Reg(P1) is updated with the number of errors remaining. 5354 ** 5355 ** The root page numbers of all tables in the database are integer 5356 ** stored in reg(P1), reg(P1+1), reg(P1+2), .... There are P2 tables 5357 ** total. 5358 ** 5359 ** If P5 is not zero, the check is done on the auxiliary database 5360 ** file, not the main database file. 5361 ** 5362 ** This opcode is used to implement the integrity_check pragma. 5363 */ 5364 case OP_IntegrityCk: { 5365 int nRoot; /* Number of tables to check. (Number of root pages.) */ 5366 int *aRoot; /* Array of rootpage numbers for tables to be checked */ 5367 int j; /* Loop counter */ 5368 int nErr; /* Number of errors reported */ 5369 char *z; /* Text of the error report */ 5370 Mem *pnErr; /* Register keeping track of errors remaining */ 5371 5372 assert( p->bIsReader ); 5373 nRoot = pOp->p2; 5374 assert( nRoot>0 ); 5375 aRoot = sqlite3DbMallocRaw(db, sizeof(int)*(nRoot+1) ); 5376 if( aRoot==0 ) goto no_mem; 5377 assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 5378 pnErr = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 5379 assert( (pnErr->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ); 5380 assert( (pnErr->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))==0 ); 5381 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5382 for(j=0; j<nRoot; j++){ 5383 aRoot[j] = (int)sqlite3VdbeIntValue(&pIn1[j]); 5384 } 5385 aRoot[j] = 0; 5386 assert( pOp->p5<db->nDb ); 5387 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p5) ); 5388 z = sqlite3BtreeIntegrityCheck(db->aDb[pOp->p5].pBt, aRoot, nRoot, 5389 (int)pnErr->u.i, &nErr); 5390 sqlite3DbFree(db, aRoot); 5391 pnErr->u.i -= nErr; 5392 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pIn1); 5393 if( nErr==0 ){ 5394 assert( z==0 ); 5395 }else if( z==0 ){ 5396 goto no_mem; 5397 }else{ 5398 sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pIn1, z, -1, SQLITE_UTF8, sqlite3_free); 5399 } 5400 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pIn1); 5401 sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pIn1, encoding); 5402 break; 5403 } 5404 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK */ 5405 5406 /* Opcode: RowSetAdd P1 P2 * * * 5407 ** Synopsis: rowset(P1)=r[P2] 5408 ** 5409 ** Insert the integer value held by register P2 into a boolean index 5410 ** held in register P1. 5411 ** 5412 ** An assertion fails if P2 is not an integer. 5413 */ 5414 case OP_RowSetAdd: { /* in1, in2 */ 5415 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5416 pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 5417 assert( (pIn2->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 ); 5418 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 ){ 5419 sqlite3VdbeMemSetRowSet(pIn1); 5420 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 ) goto no_mem; 5421 } 5422 sqlite3RowSetInsert(pIn1->u.pRowSet, pIn2->u.i); 5423 break; 5424 } 5425 5426 /* Opcode: RowSetRead P1 P2 P3 * * 5427 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=rowset(P1) 5428 ** 5429 ** Extract the smallest value from boolean index P1 and put that value into 5430 ** register P3. Or, if boolean index P1 is initially empty, leave P3 5431 ** unchanged and jump to instruction P2. 5432 */ 5433 case OP_RowSetRead: { /* jump, in1, out3 */ 5434 i64 val; 5435 5436 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5437 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 5438 || sqlite3RowSetNext(pIn1->u.pRowSet, &val)==0 5439 ){ 5440 /* The boolean index is empty */ 5441 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pIn1); 5442 VdbeBranchTaken(1,2); 5443 goto jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt; 5444 }else{ 5445 /* A value was pulled from the index */ 5446 VdbeBranchTaken(0,2); 5447 sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(&aMem[pOp->p3], val); 5448 } 5449 goto check_for_interrupt; 5450 } 5451 5452 /* Opcode: RowSetTest P1 P2 P3 P4 5453 ** Synopsis: if r[P3] in rowset(P1) goto P2 5454 ** 5455 ** Register P3 is assumed to hold a 64-bit integer value. If register P1 5456 ** contains a RowSet object and that RowSet object contains 5457 ** the value held in P3, jump to register P2. Otherwise, insert the 5458 ** integer in P3 into the RowSet and continue on to the 5459 ** next opcode. 5460 ** 5461 ** The RowSet object is optimized for the case where successive sets 5462 ** of integers, where each set contains no duplicates. Each set 5463 ** of values is identified by a unique P4 value. The first set 5464 ** must have P4==0, the final set P4=-1. P4 must be either -1 or 5465 ** non-negative. For non-negative values of P4 only the lower 4 5466 ** bits are significant. 5467 ** 5468 ** This allows optimizations: (a) when P4==0 there is no need to test 5469 ** the rowset object for P3, as it is guaranteed not to contain it, 5470 ** (b) when P4==-1 there is no need to insert the value, as it will 5471 ** never be tested for, and (c) when a value that is part of set X is 5472 ** inserted, there is no need to search to see if the same value was 5473 ** previously inserted as part of set X (only if it was previously 5474 ** inserted as part of some other set). 5475 */ 5476 case OP_RowSetTest: { /* jump, in1, in3 */ 5477 int iSet; 5478 int exists; 5479 5480 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5481 pIn3 = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 5482 iSet = pOp->p4.i; 5483 assert( pIn3->flags&MEM_Int ); 5484 5485 /* If there is anything other than a rowset object in memory cell P1, 5486 ** delete it now and initialize P1 with an empty rowset 5487 */ 5488 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 ){ 5489 sqlite3VdbeMemSetRowSet(pIn1); 5490 if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 ) goto no_mem; 5491 } 5492 5493 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_INT32 ); 5494 assert( iSet==-1 || iSet>=0 ); 5495 if( iSet ){ 5496 exists = sqlite3RowSetTest(pIn1->u.pRowSet, iSet, pIn3->u.i); 5497 VdbeBranchTaken(exists!=0,2); 5498 if( exists ) goto jump_to_p2; 5499 } 5500 if( iSet>=0 ){ 5501 sqlite3RowSetInsert(pIn1->u.pRowSet, pIn3->u.i); 5502 } 5503 break; 5504 } 5505 5506 5507 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER 5508 5509 /* Opcode: Program P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 5510 ** 5511 ** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM). 5512 ** 5513 ** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory 5514 ** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2 5515 ** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE 5516 ** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address 5517 ** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the 5518 ** memory required by the sub-vdbe at runtime. 5519 ** 5520 ** P4 is a pointer to the VM containing the trigger program. 5521 ** 5522 ** If P5 is non-zero, then recursive program invocation is enabled. 5523 */ 5524 case OP_Program: { /* jump */ 5525 int nMem; /* Number of memory registers for sub-program */ 5526 int nByte; /* Bytes of runtime space required for sub-program */ 5527 Mem *pRt; /* Register to allocate runtime space */ 5528 Mem *pMem; /* Used to iterate through memory cells */ 5529 Mem *pEnd; /* Last memory cell in new array */ 5530 VdbeFrame *pFrame; /* New vdbe frame to execute in */ 5531 SubProgram *pProgram; /* Sub-program to execute */ 5532 void *t; /* Token identifying trigger */ 5533 5534 pProgram = pOp->p4.pProgram; 5535 pRt = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 5536 assert( pProgram->nOp>0 ); 5537 5538 /* If the p5 flag is clear, then recursive invocation of triggers is 5539 ** disabled for backwards compatibility (p5 is set if this sub-program 5540 ** is really a trigger, not a foreign key action, and the flag set 5541 ** and cleared by the "PRAGMA recursive_triggers" command is clear). 5542 ** 5543 ** It is recursive invocation of triggers, at the SQL level, that is 5544 ** disabled. In some cases a single trigger may generate more than one 5545 ** SubProgram (if the trigger may be executed with more than one different 5546 ** ON CONFLICT algorithm). SubProgram structures associated with a 5547 ** single trigger all have the same value for the SubProgram.token 5548 ** variable. */ 5549 if( pOp->p5 ){ 5550 t = pProgram->token; 5551 for(pFrame=p->pFrame; pFrame && pFrame->token!=t; pFrame=pFrame->pParent); 5552 if( pFrame ) break; 5553 } 5554 5555 if( p->nFrame>=db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_TRIGGER_DEPTH] ){ 5556 rc = SQLITE_ERROR; 5557 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "too many levels of trigger recursion"); 5558 break; 5559 } 5560 5561 /* Register pRt is used to store the memory required to save the state 5562 ** of the current program, and the memory required at runtime to execute 5563 ** the trigger program. If this trigger has been fired before, then pRt 5564 ** is already allocated. Otherwise, it must be initialized. */ 5565 if( (pRt->flags&MEM_Frame)==0 ){ 5566 /* SubProgram.nMem is set to the number of memory cells used by the 5567 ** program stored in SubProgram.aOp. As well as these, one memory 5568 ** cell is required for each cursor used by the program. Set local 5569 ** variable nMem (and later, VdbeFrame.nChildMem) to this value. 5570 */ 5571 nMem = pProgram->nMem + pProgram->nCsr; 5572 nByte = ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeFrame)) 5573 + nMem * sizeof(Mem) 5574 + pProgram->nCsr * sizeof(VdbeCursor *) 5575 + pProgram->nOnce * sizeof(u8); 5576 pFrame = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, nByte); 5577 if( !pFrame ){ 5578 goto no_mem; 5579 } 5580 sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(pRt); 5581 pRt->flags = MEM_Frame; 5582 pRt->u.pFrame = pFrame; 5583 5584 pFrame->v = p; 5585 pFrame->nChildMem = nMem; 5586 pFrame->nChildCsr = pProgram->nCsr; 5587 pFrame->pc = (int)(pOp - aOp); 5588 pFrame->aMem = p->aMem; 5589 pFrame->nMem = p->nMem; 5590 pFrame->apCsr = p->apCsr; 5591 pFrame->nCursor = p->nCursor; 5592 pFrame->aOp = p->aOp; 5593 pFrame->nOp = p->nOp; 5594 pFrame->token = pProgram->token; 5595 pFrame->aOnceFlag = p->aOnceFlag; 5596 pFrame->nOnceFlag = p->nOnceFlag; 5597 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS 5598 pFrame->anExec = p->anExec; 5599 #endif 5600 5601 pEnd = &VdbeFrameMem(pFrame)[pFrame->nChildMem]; 5602 for(pMem=VdbeFrameMem(pFrame); pMem!=pEnd; pMem++){ 5603 pMem->flags = MEM_Undefined; 5604 pMem->db = db; 5605 } 5606 }else{ 5607 pFrame = pRt->u.pFrame; 5608 assert( pProgram->nMem+pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildMem ); 5609 assert( pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildCsr ); 5610 assert( (int)(pOp - aOp)==pFrame->pc ); 5611 } 5612 5613 p->nFrame++; 5614 pFrame->pParent = p->pFrame; 5615 pFrame->lastRowid = lastRowid; 5616 pFrame->nChange = p->nChange; 5617 pFrame->nDbChange = p->db->nChange; 5618 p->nChange = 0; 5619 p->pFrame = pFrame; 5620 p->aMem = aMem = &VdbeFrameMem(pFrame)[-1]; 5621 p->nMem = pFrame->nChildMem; 5622 p->nCursor = (u16)pFrame->nChildCsr; 5623 p->apCsr = (VdbeCursor **)&aMem[p->nMem+1]; 5624 p->aOp = aOp = pProgram->aOp; 5625 p->nOp = pProgram->nOp; 5626 p->aOnceFlag = (u8 *)&p->apCsr[p->nCursor]; 5627 p->nOnceFlag = pProgram->nOnce; 5628 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS 5629 p->anExec = 0; 5630 #endif 5631 pOp = &aOp[-1]; 5632 memset(p->aOnceFlag, 0, p->nOnceFlag); 5633 5634 break; 5635 } 5636 5637 /* Opcode: Param P1 P2 * * * 5638 ** 5639 ** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the 5640 ** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory 5641 ** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames 5642 ** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.* 5643 ** and old.* values. 5644 ** 5645 ** The address of the cell in the parent frame is determined by adding 5646 ** the value of the P1 argument to the value of the P1 argument to the 5647 ** calling OP_Program instruction. 5648 */ 5649 case OP_Param: { /* out2 */ 5650 VdbeFrame *pFrame; 5651 Mem *pIn; 5652 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 5653 pFrame = p->pFrame; 5654 pIn = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1 + pFrame->aOp[pFrame->pc].p1]; 5655 sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn, MEM_Ephem); 5656 break; 5657 } 5658 5659 #endif /* #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER */ 5660 5661 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY 5662 /* Opcode: FkCounter P1 P2 * * * 5663 ** Synopsis: fkctr[P1]+=P2 5664 ** 5665 ** Increment a "constraint counter" by P2 (P2 may be negative or positive). 5666 ** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented 5667 ** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the 5668 ** statement counter is incremented (immediate foreign key constraints). 5669 */ 5670 case OP_FkCounter: { 5671 if( db->flags & SQLITE_DeferFKs ){ 5672 db->nDeferredImmCons += pOp->p2; 5673 }else if( pOp->p1 ){ 5674 db->nDeferredCons += pOp->p2; 5675 }else{ 5676 p->nFkConstraint += pOp->p2; 5677 } 5678 break; 5679 } 5680 5681 /* Opcode: FkIfZero P1 P2 * * * 5682 ** Synopsis: if fkctr[P1]==0 goto P2 5683 ** 5684 ** This opcode tests if a foreign key constraint-counter is currently zero. 5685 ** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next 5686 ** instruction. 5687 ** 5688 ** If P1 is non-zero, then the jump is taken if the database constraint-counter 5689 ** is zero (the one that counts deferred constraint violations). If P1 is 5690 ** zero, the jump is taken if the statement constraint-counter is zero 5691 ** (immediate foreign key constraint violations). 5692 */ 5693 case OP_FkIfZero: { /* jump */ 5694 if( pOp->p1 ){ 5695 VdbeBranchTaken(db->nDeferredCons==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0, 2); 5696 if( db->nDeferredCons==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0 ) goto jump_to_p2; 5697 }else{ 5698 VdbeBranchTaken(p->nFkConstraint==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0, 2); 5699 if( p->nFkConstraint==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0 ) goto jump_to_p2; 5700 } 5701 break; 5702 } 5703 #endif /* #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY */ 5704 5705 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT 5706 /* Opcode: MemMax P1 P2 * * * 5707 ** Synopsis: r[P1]=max(r[P1],r[P2]) 5708 ** 5709 ** P1 is a register in the root frame of this VM (the root frame is 5710 ** different from the current frame if this instruction is being executed 5711 ** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of 5712 ** its current value and the value in register P2. 5713 ** 5714 ** This instruction throws an error if the memory cell is not initially 5715 ** an integer. 5716 */ 5717 case OP_MemMax: { /* in2 */ 5718 VdbeFrame *pFrame; 5719 if( p->pFrame ){ 5720 for(pFrame=p->pFrame; pFrame->pParent; pFrame=pFrame->pParent); 5721 pIn1 = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1]; 5722 }else{ 5723 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5724 } 5725 assert( memIsValid(pIn1) ); 5726 sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn1); 5727 pIn2 = &aMem[pOp->p2]; 5728 sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pIn2); 5729 if( pIn1->u.i<pIn2->u.i){ 5730 pIn1->u.i = pIn2->u.i; 5731 } 5732 break; 5733 } 5734 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT */ 5735 5736 /* Opcode: IfPos P1 P2 P3 * * 5737 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]>0 then r[P1]-=P3, goto P2 5738 ** 5739 ** Register P1 must contain an integer. 5740 ** If the value of register P1 is 1 or greater, subtract P3 from the 5741 ** value in P1 and jump to P2. 5742 ** 5743 ** If the initial value of register P1 is less than 1, then the 5744 ** value is unchanged and control passes through to the next instruction. 5745 */ 5746 case OP_IfPos: { /* jump, in1 */ 5747 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5748 assert( pIn1->flags&MEM_Int ); 5749 VdbeBranchTaken( pIn1->u.i>0, 2); 5750 if( pIn1->u.i>0 ){ 5751 pIn1->u.i -= pOp->p3; 5752 goto jump_to_p2; 5753 } 5754 break; 5755 } 5756 5757 /* Opcode: SetIfNotPos P1 P2 P3 * * 5758 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]<=0 then r[P2]=P3 5759 ** 5760 ** Register P1 must contain an integer. 5761 ** If the value of register P1 is not positive (if it is less than 1) then 5762 ** set the value of register P2 to be the integer P3. 5763 */ 5764 case OP_SetIfNotPos: { /* in1, in2 */ 5765 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5766 assert( pIn1->flags&MEM_Int ); 5767 if( pIn1->u.i<=0 ){ 5768 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 5769 pOut->u.i = pOp->p3; 5770 } 5771 break; 5772 } 5773 5774 /* Opcode: IfNotZero P1 P2 P3 * * 5775 ** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=0 then r[P1]-=P3, goto P2 5776 ** 5777 ** Register P1 must contain an integer. If the content of register P1 is 5778 ** initially nonzero, then subtract P3 from the value in register P1 and 5779 ** jump to P2. If register P1 is initially zero, leave it unchanged 5780 ** and fall through. 5781 */ 5782 case OP_IfNotZero: { /* jump, in1 */ 5783 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5784 assert( pIn1->flags&MEM_Int ); 5785 VdbeBranchTaken(pIn1->u.i<0, 2); 5786 if( pIn1->u.i ){ 5787 pIn1->u.i -= pOp->p3; 5788 goto jump_to_p2; 5789 } 5790 break; 5791 } 5792 5793 /* Opcode: DecrJumpZero P1 P2 * * * 5794 ** Synopsis: if (--r[P1])==0 goto P2 5795 ** 5796 ** Register P1 must hold an integer. Decrement the value in register P1 5797 ** then jump to P2 if the new value is exactly zero. 5798 */ 5799 case OP_DecrJumpZero: { /* jump, in1 */ 5800 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5801 assert( pIn1->flags&MEM_Int ); 5802 pIn1->u.i--; 5803 VdbeBranchTaken(pIn1->u.i==0, 2); 5804 if( pIn1->u.i==0 ) goto jump_to_p2; 5805 break; 5806 } 5807 5808 5809 /* Opcode: JumpZeroIncr P1 P2 * * * 5810 ** Synopsis: if (r[P1]++)==0 ) goto P2 5811 ** 5812 ** The register P1 must contain an integer. If register P1 is initially 5813 ** zero, then jump to P2. Increment register P1 regardless of whether or 5814 ** not the jump is taken. 5815 */ 5816 case OP_JumpZeroIncr: { /* jump, in1 */ 5817 pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5818 assert( pIn1->flags&MEM_Int ); 5819 VdbeBranchTaken(pIn1->u.i==0, 2); 5820 if( (pIn1->u.i++)==0 ) goto jump_to_p2; 5821 break; 5822 } 5823 5824 /* Opcode: AggStep0 * P2 P3 P4 P5 5825 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] step(r[P2@P5]) 5826 ** 5827 ** Execute the step function for an aggregate. The 5828 ** function has P5 arguments. P4 is a pointer to the FuncDef 5829 ** structure that specifies the function. Register P3 is the 5830 ** accumulator. 5831 ** 5832 ** The P5 arguments are taken from register P2 and its 5833 ** successors. 5834 */ 5835 /* Opcode: AggStep * P2 P3 P4 P5 5836 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] step(r[P2@P5]) 5837 ** 5838 ** Execute the step function for an aggregate. The 5839 ** function has P5 arguments. P4 is a pointer to an sqlite3_context 5840 ** object that is used to run the function. Register P3 is 5841 ** as the accumulator. 5842 ** 5843 ** The P5 arguments are taken from register P2 and its 5844 ** successors. 5845 ** 5846 ** This opcode is initially coded as OP_AggStep0. On first evaluation, 5847 ** the FuncDef stored in P4 is converted into an sqlite3_context and 5848 ** the opcode is changed. In this way, the initialization of the 5849 ** sqlite3_context only happens once, instead of on each call to the 5850 ** step function. 5851 */ 5852 case OP_AggStep0: { 5853 int n; 5854 sqlite3_context *pCtx; 5855 5856 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_FUNCDEF ); 5857 n = pOp->p5; 5858 assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 5859 assert( n==0 || (pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2+n<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor)+1) ); 5860 assert( pOp->p3<pOp->p2 || pOp->p3>=pOp->p2+n ); 5861 pCtx = sqlite3DbMallocRaw(db, sizeof(*pCtx) + (n-1)*sizeof(sqlite3_value*)); 5862 if( pCtx==0 ) goto no_mem; 5863 pCtx->pMem = 0; 5864 pCtx->pFunc = pOp->p4.pFunc; 5865 pCtx->iOp = (int)(pOp - aOp); 5866 pCtx->pVdbe = p; 5867 pCtx->argc = n; 5868 pOp->p4type = P4_FUNCCTX; 5869 pOp->p4.pCtx = pCtx; 5870 pOp->opcode = OP_AggStep; 5871 /* Fall through into OP_AggStep */ 5872 } 5873 case OP_AggStep: { 5874 int i; 5875 sqlite3_context *pCtx; 5876 Mem *pMem; 5877 Mem t; 5878 5879 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_FUNCCTX ); 5880 pCtx = pOp->p4.pCtx; 5881 pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 5882 5883 /* If this function is inside of a trigger, the register array in aMem[] 5884 ** might change from one evaluation to the next. The next block of code 5885 ** checks to see if the register array has changed, and if so it 5886 ** reinitializes the relavant parts of the sqlite3_context object */ 5887 if( pCtx->pMem != pMem ){ 5888 pCtx->pMem = pMem; 5889 for(i=pCtx->argc-1; i>=0; i--) pCtx->argv[i] = &aMem[pOp->p2+i]; 5890 } 5891 5892 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 5893 for(i=0; i<pCtx->argc; i++){ 5894 assert( memIsValid(pCtx->argv[i]) ); 5895 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p2+i, pCtx->argv[i]); 5896 } 5897 #endif 5898 5899 pMem->n++; 5900 sqlite3VdbeMemInit(&t, db, MEM_Null); 5901 pCtx->pOut = &t; 5902 pCtx->fErrorOrAux = 0; 5903 pCtx->skipFlag = 0; 5904 (pCtx->pFunc->xStep)(pCtx,pCtx->argc,pCtx->argv); /* IMP: R-24505-23230 */ 5905 if( pCtx->fErrorOrAux ){ 5906 if( pCtx->isError ){ 5907 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3_value_text(&t)); 5908 rc = pCtx->isError; 5909 } 5910 sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&t); 5911 }else{ 5912 assert( t.flags==MEM_Null ); 5913 } 5914 if( pCtx->skipFlag ){ 5915 assert( pOp[-1].opcode==OP_CollSeq ); 5916 i = pOp[-1].p1; 5917 if( i ) sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(&aMem[i], 1); 5918 } 5919 break; 5920 } 5921 5922 /* Opcode: AggFinal P1 P2 * P4 * 5923 ** Synopsis: accum=r[P1] N=P2 5924 ** 5925 ** Execute the finalizer function for an aggregate. P1 is 5926 ** the memory location that is the accumulator for the aggregate. 5927 ** 5928 ** P2 is the number of arguments that the step function takes and 5929 ** P4 is a pointer to the FuncDef for this function. The P2 5930 ** argument is not used by this opcode. It is only there to disambiguate 5931 ** functions that can take varying numbers of arguments. The 5932 ** P4 argument is only needed for the degenerate case where 5933 ** the step function was not previously called. 5934 */ 5935 case OP_AggFinal: { 5936 Mem *pMem; 5937 assert( pOp->p1>0 && pOp->p1<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 5938 pMem = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 5939 assert( (pMem->flags & ~(MEM_Null|MEM_Agg))==0 ); 5940 rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFinalize(pMem, pOp->p4.pFunc); 5941 if( rc ){ 5942 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3_value_text(pMem)); 5943 } 5944 sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pMem, encoding); 5945 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pMem); 5946 if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pMem) ){ 5947 goto too_big; 5948 } 5949 break; 5950 } 5951 5952 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL 5953 /* Opcode: Checkpoint P1 P2 P3 * * 5954 ** 5955 ** Checkpoint database P1. This is a no-op if P1 is not currently in 5956 ** WAL mode. Parameter P2 is one of SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE, FULL, 5957 ** RESTART, or TRUNCATE. Write 1 or 0 into mem[P3] if the checkpoint returns 5958 ** SQLITE_BUSY or not, respectively. Write the number of pages in the 5959 ** WAL after the checkpoint into mem[P3+1] and the number of pages 5960 ** in the WAL that have been checkpointed after the checkpoint 5961 ** completes into mem[P3+2]. However on an error, mem[P3+1] and 5962 ** mem[P3+2] are initialized to -1. 5963 */ 5964 case OP_Checkpoint: { 5965 int i; /* Loop counter */ 5966 int aRes[3]; /* Results */ 5967 Mem *pMem; /* Write results here */ 5968 5969 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 5970 aRes[0] = 0; 5971 aRes[1] = aRes[2] = -1; 5972 assert( pOp->p2==SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE 5973 || pOp->p2==SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL 5974 || pOp->p2==SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART 5975 || pOp->p2==SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_TRUNCATE 5976 ); 5977 rc = sqlite3Checkpoint(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, &aRes[1], &aRes[2]); 5978 if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){ 5979 rc = SQLITE_OK; 5980 aRes[0] = 1; 5981 } 5982 for(i=0, pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; i<3; i++, pMem++){ 5983 sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem, (i64)aRes[i]); 5984 } 5985 break; 5986 }; 5987 #endif 5988 5989 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PRAGMA 5990 /* Opcode: JournalMode P1 P2 P3 * * 5991 ** 5992 ** Change the journal mode of database P1 to P3. P3 must be one of the 5993 ** PAGER_JOURNALMODE_XXX values. If changing between the various rollback 5994 ** modes (delete, truncate, persist, off and memory), this is a simple 5995 ** operation. No IO is required. 5996 ** 5997 ** If changing into or out of WAL mode the procedure is more complicated. 5998 ** 5999 ** Write a string containing the final journal-mode to register P2. 6000 */ 6001 case OP_JournalMode: { /* out2 */ 6002 Btree *pBt; /* Btree to change journal mode of */ 6003 Pager *pPager; /* Pager associated with pBt */ 6004 int eNew; /* New journal mode */ 6005 int eOld; /* The old journal mode */ 6006 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL 6007 const char *zFilename; /* Name of database file for pPager */ 6008 #endif 6009 6010 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 6011 eNew = pOp->p3; 6012 assert( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE 6013 || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE 6014 || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST 6015 || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF 6016 || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY 6017 || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL 6018 || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_QUERY 6019 ); 6020 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); 6021 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 6022 6023 pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt; 6024 pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pBt); 6025 eOld = sqlite3PagerGetJournalMode(pPager); 6026 if( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_QUERY ) eNew = eOld; 6027 if( !sqlite3PagerOkToChangeJournalMode(pPager) ) eNew = eOld; 6028 6029 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL 6030 zFilename = sqlite3PagerFilename(pPager, 1); 6031 6032 /* Do not allow a transition to journal_mode=WAL for a database 6033 ** in temporary storage or if the VFS does not support shared memory 6034 */ 6035 if( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL 6036 && (sqlite3Strlen30(zFilename)==0 /* Temp file */ 6037 || !sqlite3PagerWalSupported(pPager)) /* No shared-memory support */ 6038 ){ 6039 eNew = eOld; 6040 } 6041 6042 if( (eNew!=eOld) 6043 && (eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL) 6044 ){ 6045 if( !db->autoCommit || db->nVdbeRead>1 ){ 6046 rc = SQLITE_ERROR; 6047 sqlite3VdbeError(p, 6048 "cannot change %s wal mode from within a transaction", 6049 (eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ? "into" : "out of") 6050 ); 6051 break; 6052 }else{ 6053 6054 if( eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ){ 6055 /* If leaving WAL mode, close the log file. If successful, the call 6056 ** to PagerCloseWal() checkpoints and deletes the write-ahead-log 6057 ** file. An EXCLUSIVE lock may still be held on the database file 6058 ** after a successful return. 6059 */ 6060 rc = sqlite3PagerCloseWal(pPager); 6061 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 6062 sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, eNew); 6063 } 6064 }else if( eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY ){ 6065 /* Cannot transition directly from MEMORY to WAL. Use mode OFF 6066 ** as an intermediate */ 6067 sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF); 6068 } 6069 6070 /* Open a transaction on the database file. Regardless of the journal 6071 ** mode, this transaction always uses a rollback journal. 6072 */ 6073 assert( sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(pBt)==0 ); 6074 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 6075 rc = sqlite3BtreeSetVersion(pBt, (eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ? 2 : 1)); 6076 } 6077 } 6078 } 6079 #endif /* ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL */ 6080 6081 if( rc ){ 6082 eNew = eOld; 6083 } 6084 eNew = sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, eNew); 6085 6086 pOut->flags = MEM_Str|MEM_Static|MEM_Term; 6087 pOut->z = (char *)sqlite3JournalModename(eNew); 6088 pOut->n = sqlite3Strlen30(pOut->z); 6089 pOut->enc = SQLITE_UTF8; 6090 sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pOut, encoding); 6091 break; 6092 }; 6093 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_PRAGMA */ 6094 6095 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VACUUM) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ATTACH) 6096 /* Opcode: Vacuum * * * * * 6097 ** 6098 ** Vacuum the entire database. This opcode will cause other virtual 6099 ** machines to be created and run. It may not be called from within 6100 ** a transaction. 6101 */ 6102 case OP_Vacuum: { 6103 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 6104 rc = sqlite3RunVacuum(&p->zErrMsg, db); 6105 break; 6106 } 6107 #endif 6108 6109 #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM) 6110 /* Opcode: IncrVacuum P1 P2 * * * 6111 ** 6112 ** Perform a single step of the incremental vacuum procedure on 6113 ** the P1 database. If the vacuum has finished, jump to instruction 6114 ** P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next instruction. 6115 */ 6116 case OP_IncrVacuum: { /* jump */ 6117 Btree *pBt; 6118 6119 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); 6120 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p1) ); 6121 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 6122 pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt; 6123 rc = sqlite3BtreeIncrVacuum(pBt); 6124 VdbeBranchTaken(rc==SQLITE_DONE,2); 6125 if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){ 6126 rc = SQLITE_OK; 6127 goto jump_to_p2; 6128 } 6129 break; 6130 } 6131 #endif 6132 6133 /* Opcode: Expire P1 * * * * 6134 ** 6135 ** Cause precompiled statements to expire. When an expired statement 6136 ** is executed using sqlite3_step() it will either automatically 6137 ** reprepare itself (if it was originally created using sqlite3_prepare_v2()) 6138 ** or it will fail with SQLITE_SCHEMA. 6139 ** 6140 ** If P1 is 0, then all SQL statements become expired. If P1 is non-zero, 6141 ** then only the currently executing statement is expired. 6142 */ 6143 case OP_Expire: { 6144 if( !pOp->p1 ){ 6145 sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db); 6146 }else{ 6147 p->expired = 1; 6148 } 6149 break; 6150 } 6151 6152 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE 6153 /* Opcode: TableLock P1 P2 P3 P4 * 6154 ** Synopsis: iDb=P1 root=P2 write=P3 6155 ** 6156 ** Obtain a lock on a particular table. This instruction is only used when 6157 ** the shared-cache feature is enabled. 6158 ** 6159 ** P1 is the index of the database in sqlite3.aDb[] of the database 6160 ** on which the lock is acquired. A readlock is obtained if P3==0 or 6161 ** a write lock if P3==1. 6162 ** 6163 ** P2 contains the root-page of the table to lock. 6164 ** 6165 ** P4 contains a pointer to the name of the table being locked. This is only 6166 ** used to generate an error message if the lock cannot be obtained. 6167 */ 6168 case OP_TableLock: { 6169 u8 isWriteLock = (u8)pOp->p3; 6170 if( isWriteLock || 0==(db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommitted) ){ 6171 int p1 = pOp->p1; 6172 assert( p1>=0 && p1<db->nDb ); 6173 assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, p1) ); 6174 assert( isWriteLock==0 || isWriteLock==1 ); 6175 rc = sqlite3BtreeLockTable(db->aDb[p1].pBt, pOp->p2, isWriteLock); 6176 if( (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_LOCKED ){ 6177 const char *z = pOp->p4.z; 6178 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "database table is locked: %s", z); 6179 } 6180 } 6181 break; 6182 } 6183 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE */ 6184 6185 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6186 /* Opcode: VBegin * * * P4 * 6187 ** 6188 ** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the 6189 ** xBegin method for that table. 6190 ** 6191 ** Also, whether or not P4 is set, check that this is not being called from 6192 ** within a callback to a virtual table xSync() method. If it is, the error 6193 ** code will be set to SQLITE_LOCKED. 6194 */ 6195 case OP_VBegin: { 6196 VTable *pVTab; 6197 pVTab = pOp->p4.pVtab; 6198 rc = sqlite3VtabBegin(db, pVTab); 6199 if( pVTab ) sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVTab->pVtab); 6200 break; 6201 } 6202 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 6203 6204 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6205 /* Opcode: VCreate P1 P2 * * * 6206 ** 6207 ** P2 is a register that holds the name of a virtual table in database 6208 ** P1. Call the xCreate method for that table. 6209 */ 6210 case OP_VCreate: { 6211 Mem sMem; /* For storing the record being decoded */ 6212 const char *zTab; /* Name of the virtual table */ 6213 6214 memset(&sMem, 0, sizeof(sMem)); 6215 sMem.db = db; 6216 /* Because P2 is always a static string, it is impossible for the 6217 ** sqlite3VdbeMemCopy() to fail */ 6218 assert( (aMem[pOp->p2].flags & MEM_Str)!=0 ); 6219 assert( (aMem[pOp->p2].flags & MEM_Static)!=0 ); 6220 rc = sqlite3VdbeMemCopy(&sMem, &aMem[pOp->p2]); 6221 assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); 6222 zTab = (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(&sMem); 6223 assert( zTab || db->mallocFailed ); 6224 if( zTab ){ 6225 rc = sqlite3VtabCallCreate(db, pOp->p1, zTab, &p->zErrMsg); 6226 } 6227 sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&sMem); 6228 break; 6229 } 6230 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 6231 6232 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6233 /* Opcode: VDestroy P1 * * P4 * 6234 ** 6235 ** P4 is the name of a virtual table in database P1. Call the xDestroy method 6236 ** of that table. 6237 */ 6238 case OP_VDestroy: { 6239 db->nVDestroy++; 6240 rc = sqlite3VtabCallDestroy(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p4.z); 6241 db->nVDestroy--; 6242 break; 6243 } 6244 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 6245 6246 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6247 /* Opcode: VOpen P1 * * P4 * 6248 ** 6249 ** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure. 6250 ** P1 is a cursor number. This opcode opens a cursor to the virtual 6251 ** table and stores that cursor in P1. 6252 */ 6253 case OP_VOpen: { 6254 VdbeCursor *pCur; 6255 sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVCur; 6256 sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; 6257 const sqlite3_module *pModule; 6258 6259 assert( p->bIsReader ); 6260 pCur = 0; 6261 pVCur = 0; 6262 pVtab = pOp->p4.pVtab->pVtab; 6263 if( pVtab==0 || NEVER(pVtab->pModule==0) ){ 6264 rc = SQLITE_LOCKED; 6265 break; 6266 } 6267 pModule = pVtab->pModule; 6268 rc = pModule->xOpen(pVtab, &pVCur); 6269 sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); 6270 if( SQLITE_OK==rc ){ 6271 /* Initialize sqlite3_vtab_cursor base class */ 6272 pVCur->pVtab = pVtab; 6273 6274 /* Initialize vdbe cursor object */ 6275 pCur = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, 0, -1, CURTYPE_VTAB); 6276 if( pCur ){ 6277 pCur->uc.pVCur = pVCur; 6278 pVtab->nRef++; 6279 }else{ 6280 assert( db->mallocFailed ); 6281 pModule->xClose(pVCur); 6282 goto no_mem; 6283 } 6284 } 6285 break; 6286 } 6287 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 6288 6289 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6290 /* Opcode: VFilter P1 P2 P3 P4 * 6291 ** Synopsis: iplan=r[P3] zplan='P4' 6292 ** 6293 ** P1 is a cursor opened using VOpen. P2 is an address to jump to if 6294 ** the filtered result set is empty. 6295 ** 6296 ** P4 is either NULL or a string that was generated by the xBestIndex 6297 ** method of the module. The interpretation of the P4 string is left 6298 ** to the module implementation. 6299 ** 6300 ** This opcode invokes the xFilter method on the virtual table specified 6301 ** by P1. The integer query plan parameter to xFilter is stored in register 6302 ** P3. Register P3+1 stores the argc parameter to be passed to the 6303 ** xFilter method. Registers P3+2..P3+1+argc are the argc 6304 ** additional parameters which are passed to 6305 ** xFilter as argv. Register P3+2 becomes argv[0] when passed to xFilter. 6306 ** 6307 ** A jump is made to P2 if the result set after filtering would be empty. 6308 */ 6309 case OP_VFilter: { /* jump */ 6310 int nArg; 6311 int iQuery; 6312 const sqlite3_module *pModule; 6313 Mem *pQuery; 6314 Mem *pArgc; 6315 sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVCur; 6316 sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; 6317 VdbeCursor *pCur; 6318 int res; 6319 int i; 6320 Mem **apArg; 6321 6322 pQuery = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 6323 pArgc = &pQuery[1]; 6324 pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 6325 assert( memIsValid(pQuery) ); 6326 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pQuery); 6327 assert( pCur->eCurType==CURTYPE_VTAB ); 6328 pVCur = pCur->uc.pVCur; 6329 pVtab = pVCur->pVtab; 6330 pModule = pVtab->pModule; 6331 6332 /* Grab the index number and argc parameters */ 6333 assert( (pQuery->flags&MEM_Int)!=0 && pArgc->flags==MEM_Int ); 6334 nArg = (int)pArgc->u.i; 6335 iQuery = (int)pQuery->u.i; 6336 6337 /* Invoke the xFilter method */ 6338 res = 0; 6339 apArg = p->apArg; 6340 for(i = 0; i<nArg; i++){ 6341 apArg[i] = &pArgc[i+1]; 6342 } 6343 rc = pModule->xFilter(pVCur, iQuery, pOp->p4.z, nArg, apArg); 6344 sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); 6345 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 6346 res = pModule->xEof(pVCur); 6347 } 6348 pCur->nullRow = 0; 6349 VdbeBranchTaken(res!=0,2); 6350 if( res ) goto jump_to_p2; 6351 break; 6352 } 6353 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 6354 6355 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6356 /* Opcode: VColumn P1 P2 P3 * * 6357 ** Synopsis: r[P3]=vcolumn(P2) 6358 ** 6359 ** Store the value of the P2-th column of 6360 ** the row of the virtual-table that the 6361 ** P1 cursor is pointing to into register P3. 6362 */ 6363 case OP_VColumn: { 6364 sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; 6365 const sqlite3_module *pModule; 6366 Mem *pDest; 6367 sqlite3_context sContext; 6368 6369 VdbeCursor *pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 6370 assert( pCur->eCurType==CURTYPE_VTAB ); 6371 assert( pOp->p3>0 && pOp->p3<=(p->nMem-p->nCursor) ); 6372 pDest = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 6373 memAboutToChange(p, pDest); 6374 if( pCur->nullRow ){ 6375 sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pDest); 6376 break; 6377 } 6378 pVtab = pCur->uc.pVCur->pVtab; 6379 pModule = pVtab->pModule; 6380 assert( pModule->xColumn ); 6381 memset(&sContext, 0, sizeof(sContext)); 6382 sContext.pOut = pDest; 6383 MemSetTypeFlag(pDest, MEM_Null); 6384 rc = pModule->xColumn(pCur->uc.pVCur, &sContext, pOp->p2); 6385 sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); 6386 if( sContext.isError ){ 6387 rc = sContext.isError; 6388 } 6389 sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pDest, encoding); 6390 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p3, pDest); 6391 UPDATE_MAX_BLOBSIZE(pDest); 6392 6393 if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pDest) ){ 6394 goto too_big; 6395 } 6396 break; 6397 } 6398 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 6399 6400 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6401 /* Opcode: VNext P1 P2 * * * 6402 ** 6403 ** Advance virtual table P1 to the next row in its result set and 6404 ** jump to instruction P2. Or, if the virtual table has reached 6405 ** the end of its result set, then fall through to the next instruction. 6406 */ 6407 case OP_VNext: { /* jump */ 6408 sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; 6409 const sqlite3_module *pModule; 6410 int res; 6411 VdbeCursor *pCur; 6412 6413 res = 0; 6414 pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 6415 assert( pCur->eCurType==CURTYPE_VTAB ); 6416 if( pCur->nullRow ){ 6417 break; 6418 } 6419 pVtab = pCur->uc.pVCur->pVtab; 6420 pModule = pVtab->pModule; 6421 assert( pModule->xNext ); 6422 6423 /* Invoke the xNext() method of the module. There is no way for the 6424 ** underlying implementation to return an error if one occurs during 6425 ** xNext(). Instead, if an error occurs, true is returned (indicating that 6426 ** data is available) and the error code returned when xColumn or 6427 ** some other method is next invoked on the save virtual table cursor. 6428 */ 6429 rc = pModule->xNext(pCur->uc.pVCur); 6430 sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); 6431 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 6432 res = pModule->xEof(pCur->uc.pVCur); 6433 } 6434 VdbeBranchTaken(!res,2); 6435 if( !res ){ 6436 /* If there is data, jump to P2 */ 6437 goto jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt; 6438 } 6439 goto check_for_interrupt; 6440 } 6441 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 6442 6443 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6444 /* Opcode: VRename P1 * * P4 * 6445 ** 6446 ** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure. 6447 ** This opcode invokes the corresponding xRename method. The value 6448 ** in register P1 is passed as the zName argument to the xRename method. 6449 */ 6450 case OP_VRename: { 6451 sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; 6452 Mem *pName; 6453 6454 pVtab = pOp->p4.pVtab->pVtab; 6455 pName = &aMem[pOp->p1]; 6456 assert( pVtab->pModule->xRename ); 6457 assert( memIsValid(pName) ); 6458 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 6459 REGISTER_TRACE(pOp->p1, pName); 6460 assert( pName->flags & MEM_Str ); 6461 testcase( pName->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 ); 6462 testcase( pName->enc==SQLITE_UTF16BE ); 6463 testcase( pName->enc==SQLITE_UTF16LE ); 6464 rc = sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pName, SQLITE_UTF8); 6465 if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ 6466 rc = pVtab->pModule->xRename(pVtab, pName->z); 6467 sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); 6468 p->expired = 0; 6469 } 6470 break; 6471 } 6472 #endif 6473 6474 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE 6475 /* Opcode: VUpdate P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 6476 ** Synopsis: data=r[P3@P2] 6477 ** 6478 ** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure. 6479 ** This opcode invokes the corresponding xUpdate method. P2 values 6480 ** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate 6481 ** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the 6482 ** p2th element of the argv array passed to xUpdate. 6483 ** 6484 ** The xUpdate method will do a DELETE or an INSERT or both. 6485 ** The argv[0] element (which corresponds to memory cell P3) 6486 ** is the rowid of a row to delete. If argv[0] is NULL then no 6487 ** deletion occurs. The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new 6488 ** row. This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new 6489 ** rowid for itself. The subsequent elements in the array are 6490 ** the values of columns in the new row. 6491 ** 6492 ** If P2==1 then no insert is performed. argv[0] is the rowid of 6493 ** a row to delete. 6494 ** 6495 ** P1 is a boolean flag. If it is set to true and the xUpdate call 6496 ** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() 6497 ** is set to the value of the rowid for the row just inserted. 6498 ** 6499 ** P5 is the error actions (OE_Replace, OE_Fail, OE_Ignore, etc) to 6500 ** apply in the case of a constraint failure on an insert or update. 6501 */ 6502 case OP_VUpdate: { 6503 sqlite3_vtab *pVtab; 6504 const sqlite3_module *pModule; 6505 int nArg; 6506 int i; 6507 sqlite_int64 rowid; 6508 Mem **apArg; 6509 Mem *pX; 6510 6511 assert( pOp->p2==1 || pOp->p5==OE_Fail || pOp->p5==OE_Rollback 6512 || pOp->p5==OE_Abort || pOp->p5==OE_Ignore || pOp->p5==OE_Replace 6513 ); 6514 assert( p->readOnly==0 ); 6515 pVtab = pOp->p4.pVtab->pVtab; 6516 if( pVtab==0 || NEVER(pVtab->pModule==0) ){ 6517 rc = SQLITE_LOCKED; 6518 break; 6519 } 6520 pModule = pVtab->pModule; 6521 nArg = pOp->p2; 6522 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_VTAB ); 6523 if( ALWAYS(pModule->xUpdate) ){ 6524 u8 vtabOnConflict = db->vtabOnConflict; 6525 apArg = p->apArg; 6526 pX = &aMem[pOp->p3]; 6527 for(i=0; i<nArg; i++){ 6528 assert( memIsValid(pX) ); 6529 memAboutToChange(p, pX); 6530 apArg[i] = pX; 6531 pX++; 6532 } 6533 db->vtabOnConflict = pOp->p5; 6534 rc = pModule->xUpdate(pVtab, nArg, apArg, &rowid); 6535 db->vtabOnConflict = vtabOnConflict; 6536 sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(p, pVtab); 6537 if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pOp->p1 ){ 6538 assert( nArg>1 && apArg[0] && (apArg[0]->flags&MEM_Null) ); 6539 db->lastRowid = lastRowid = rowid; 6540 } 6541 if( (rc&0xff)==SQLITE_CONSTRAINT && pOp->p4.pVtab->bConstraint ){ 6542 if( pOp->p5==OE_Ignore ){ 6543 rc = SQLITE_OK; 6544 }else{ 6545 p->errorAction = ((pOp->p5==OE_Replace) ? OE_Abort : pOp->p5); 6546 } 6547 }else{ 6548 p->nChange++; 6549 } 6550 } 6551 break; 6552 } 6553 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ 6554 6555 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PAGER_PRAGMAS 6556 /* Opcode: Pagecount P1 P2 * * * 6557 ** 6558 ** Write the current number of pages in database P1 to memory cell P2. 6559 */ 6560 case OP_Pagecount: { /* out2 */ 6561 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 6562 pOut->u.i = sqlite3BtreeLastPage(db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt); 6563 break; 6564 } 6565 #endif 6566 6567 6568 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PAGER_PRAGMAS 6569 /* Opcode: MaxPgcnt P1 P2 P3 * * 6570 ** 6571 ** Try to set the maximum page count for database P1 to the value in P3. 6572 ** Do not let the maximum page count fall below the current page count and 6573 ** do not change the maximum page count value if P3==0. 6574 ** 6575 ** Store the maximum page count after the change in register P2. 6576 */ 6577 case OP_MaxPgcnt: { /* out2 */ 6578 unsigned int newMax; 6579 Btree *pBt; 6580 6581 pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp); 6582 pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt; 6583 newMax = 0; 6584 if( pOp->p3 ){ 6585 newMax = sqlite3BtreeLastPage(pBt); 6586 if( newMax < (unsigned)pOp->p3 ) newMax = (unsigned)pOp->p3; 6587 } 6588 pOut->u.i = sqlite3BtreeMaxPageCount(pBt, newMax); 6589 break; 6590 } 6591 #endif 6592 6593 6594 /* Opcode: Init * P2 * P4 * 6595 ** Synopsis: Start at P2 6596 ** 6597 ** Programs contain a single instance of this opcode as the very first 6598 ** opcode. 6599 ** 6600 ** If tracing is enabled (by the sqlite3_trace()) interface, then 6601 ** the UTF-8 string contained in P4 is emitted on the trace callback. 6602 ** Or if P4 is blank, use the string returned by sqlite3_sql(). 6603 ** 6604 ** If P2 is not zero, jump to instruction P2. 6605 */ 6606 case OP_Init: { /* jump */ 6607 char *zTrace; 6608 char *z; 6609 6610 #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE 6611 if( db->xTrace 6612 && !p->doingRerun 6613 && (zTrace = (pOp->p4.z ? pOp->p4.z : p->zSql))!=0 6614 ){ 6615 z = sqlite3VdbeExpandSql(p, zTrace); 6616 db->xTrace(db->pTraceArg, z); 6617 sqlite3DbFree(db, z); 6618 } 6619 #ifdef SQLITE_USE_FCNTL_TRACE 6620 zTrace = (pOp->p4.z ? pOp->p4.z : p->zSql); 6621 if( zTrace ){ 6622 int i; 6623 for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){ 6624 if( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, i)==0 ) continue; 6625 sqlite3_file_control(db, db->aDb[i].zName, SQLITE_FCNTL_TRACE, zTrace); 6626 } 6627 } 6628 #endif /* SQLITE_USE_FCNTL_TRACE */ 6629 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 6630 if( (db->flags & SQLITE_SqlTrace)!=0 6631 && (zTrace = (pOp->p4.z ? pOp->p4.z : p->zSql))!=0 6632 ){ 6633 sqlite3DebugPrintf("SQL-trace: %s\n", zTrace); 6634 } 6635 #endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */ 6636 #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE */ 6637 if( pOp->p2 ) goto jump_to_p2; 6638 break; 6639 } 6640 6641 #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS 6642 /* Opcode: CursorHint P1 * * P4 * 6643 ** 6644 ** Provide a hint to cursor P1 that it only needs to return rows that 6645 ** satisfy the Expr in P4. TK_REGISTER terms in the P4 expression refer 6646 ** to values currently held in registers. TK_COLUMN terms in the P4 6647 ** expression refer to columns in the b-tree to which cursor P1 is pointing. 6648 */ 6649 case OP_CursorHint: { 6650 VdbeCursor *pC; 6651 6652 assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); 6653 assert( pOp->p4type==P4_EXPR ); 6654 pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; 6655 if( pC ){ 6656 assert( pC->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE ); 6657 sqlite3BtreeCursorHint(pC->uc.pCursor, BTREE_HINT_RANGE, 6658 pOp->p4.pExpr, aMem); 6659 } 6660 break; 6661 } 6662 #endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS */ 6663 6664 /* Opcode: Noop * * * * * 6665 ** 6666 ** Do nothing. This instruction is often useful as a jump 6667 ** destination. 6668 */ 6669 /* 6670 ** The magic Explain opcode are only inserted when explain==2 (which 6671 ** is to say when the EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN syntax is used.) 6672 ** This opcode records information from the optimizer. It is the 6673 ** the same as a no-op. This opcodesnever appears in a real VM program. 6674 */ 6675 default: { /* This is really OP_Noop and OP_Explain */ 6676 assert( pOp->opcode==OP_Noop || pOp->opcode==OP_Explain ); 6677 break; 6678 } 6679 6680 /***************************************************************************** 6681 ** The cases of the switch statement above this line should all be indented 6682 ** by 6 spaces. But the left-most 6 spaces have been removed to improve the 6683 ** readability. From this point on down, the normal indentation rules are 6684 ** restored. 6685 *****************************************************************************/ 6686 } 6687 6688 #ifdef VDBE_PROFILE 6689 { 6690 u64 endTime = sqlite3Hwtime(); 6691 if( endTime>start ) pOrigOp->cycles += endTime - start; 6692 pOrigOp->cnt++; 6693 } 6694 #endif 6695 6696 /* The following code adds nothing to the actual functionality 6697 ** of the program. It is only here for testing and debugging. 6698 ** On the other hand, it does burn CPU cycles every time through 6699 ** the evaluator loop. So we can leave it out when NDEBUG is defined. 6700 */ 6701 #ifndef NDEBUG 6702 assert( pOp>=&aOp[-1] && pOp<&aOp[p->nOp-1] ); 6703 6704 #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG 6705 if( db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){ 6706 if( rc!=0 ) printf("rc=%d\n",rc); 6707 if( pOrigOp->opflags & (OPFLG_OUT2) ){ 6708 registerTrace(pOrigOp->p2, &aMem[pOrigOp->p2]); 6709 } 6710 if( pOrigOp->opflags & OPFLG_OUT3 ){ 6711 registerTrace(pOrigOp->p3, &aMem[pOrigOp->p3]); 6712 } 6713 } 6714 #endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */ 6715 #endif /* NDEBUG */ 6716 } /* The end of the for(;;) loop the loops through opcodes */ 6717 6718 /* If we reach this point, it means that execution is finished with 6719 ** an error of some kind. 6720 */ 6721 vdbe_error_halt: 6722 assert( rc ); 6723 p->rc = rc; 6724 testcase( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xLog!=0 ); 6725 sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s", 6726 (int)(pOp - aOp), p->zSql, p->zErrMsg); 6727 sqlite3VdbeHalt(p); 6728 if( rc==SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ) db->mallocFailed = 1; 6729 rc = SQLITE_ERROR; 6730 if( resetSchemaOnFault>0 ){ 6731 sqlite3ResetOneSchema(db, resetSchemaOnFault-1); 6732 } 6733 6734 /* This is the only way out of this procedure. We have to 6735 ** release the mutexes on btrees that were acquired at the 6736 ** top. */ 6737 vdbe_return: 6738 db->lastRowid = lastRowid; 6739 testcase( nVmStep>0 ); 6740 p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP] += (int)nVmStep; 6741 sqlite3VdbeLeave(p); 6742 return rc; 6743 6744 /* Jump to here if a string or blob larger than SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH 6745 ** is encountered. 6746 */ 6747 too_big: 6748 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "string or blob too big"); 6749 rc = SQLITE_TOOBIG; 6750 goto vdbe_error_halt; 6751 6752 /* Jump to here if a malloc() fails. 6753 */ 6754 no_mem: 6755 db->mallocFailed = 1; 6756 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "out of memory"); 6757 rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; 6758 goto vdbe_error_halt; 6759 6760 /* Jump to here for any other kind of fatal error. The "rc" variable 6761 ** should hold the error number. 6762 */ 6763 abort_due_to_error: 6764 assert( p->zErrMsg==0 ); 6765 if( db->mallocFailed ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; 6766 if( rc!=SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ){ 6767 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3ErrStr(rc)); 6768 } 6769 goto vdbe_error_halt; 6770 6771 /* Jump to here if the sqlite3_interrupt() API sets the interrupt 6772 ** flag. 6773 */ 6774 abort_due_to_interrupt: 6775 assert( db->u1.isInterrupted ); 6776 rc = SQLITE_INTERRUPT; 6777 p->rc = rc; 6778 sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3ErrStr(rc)); 6779 goto vdbe_error_halt; 6780 } 6781